Deleted "General Information" from "Quote" column of completed books

This commit is contained in:
Larry Sallee 2022-12-20 09:19:13 -05:00
parent 397f051349
commit 9cea15dda5
13 changed files with 182 additions and 182 deletions

View File

@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ front:intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
1:2 iam1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **Grace** and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “May God multiply his kind acts to you and give you a more peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:2 z7df rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 Peter speaks of **Grace** and **peace** as if they were objects that could increase in size or number. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor that means that these things will increase, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “May grace and peace increase in your lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:2 gj71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May God multiply grace and peace to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:3 y6aq General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to talk about the believers salvation and faith. [Verses 35](../01/03.md) are one sentence, but you may need to divide them into shorter sentences in your language.
1:3 y6aq 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to talk about the believers salvation and faith. [Verses 35](../01/03.md) are one sentence, but you may need to divide them into shorter sentences in your language.
1:3 l4vi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative εὐλογητὸς 1 Peter is using a statement to give an exhortation. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for exhortation. Alternate translation: “Let us bless” or “Let us praise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1:3 z6wk rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1:3 cyf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς 1 The words **our** and **us** are inclusive. They refer to Peter and those believers to whom he is writing. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ front:intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
2:9 ra7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ ἐκ σκότους ὑμᾶς καλέσαντος, εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς 1 This clause refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, who called you from darkness into his marvelous light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:9 nvf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ σκότους & εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς 1 Here, **darkness** refers to the condition of people who do not know God and are sinful, and **light** refers to the condition of people who know God and are righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “from a life of sin and ignorance of God to a life of knowing and pleasing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:10 pveb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks οὐ λαὸς & λαὸς Θεοῦ & οὐκ ἠλεημένοι & ἐλεηθέντες 1 All four of these phrases are quotations from the Old Testament ([Hosea 1:610](../hos/01/06.md)). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate these quotations with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2:11 jnr9 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to tell his readers how to live Christian lives.
2:11 jnr9 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to tell his readers how to live Christian lives.
2:11 ve9u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet παροίκους καὶ παρεπιδήμους 1 Here, **foreigners** and **exiles** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Christians on this earth are far away from their home in heaven. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “true exiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:11 x8af rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παροίκους 1 Peter uses **foreigners** here to refer to his Christian readers. Just like a foreigner is not in his homeland, so are Christians not at home while living on the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those living away from their home in heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:11 hjuk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παρεπιδήμους 1 See how you translated **exiles** in [1:1](../01/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ front:intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
2:16 zqe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς ἐλεύθεροι 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. These words could be: (1) the command to submit to authorities stated in [verse 13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “submit as free people” (2) an implied imperative verb. Alternate translation: “act as free people” or “live as free people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:16 y9pg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὡς ἐπικάλυμμα & τῆς κακίας 1 Here, **covering** could refer to: (1) something to prevent people from knowing about ones evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as a way to prevent others from seeing your evil” (2) an excuse or pretext to do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as an excuse to do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:17 gwy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν ἀδελφότητα 1 Here, **brotherhood** refers to all Christian believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the community of believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:18 w2nc General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to speak specifically to people who were slaves who worked in peoples houses.
2:18 w2nc 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to speak specifically to people who were slaves who worked in peoples houses.
2:18 xgk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς καὶ ἐπιεικέσιν 1 The words **good** and **gentle** mean similar things. Peter uses this repetition to emphasize that such masters treat their servants very kindly. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “to the very kind ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:18 mueb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς σκολιοῖς 1 Here, **crooked ones** is used to refer to people who act dishonestly or unjustly as if their morals were an object that could be bent or twisted. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the dishonest ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:19 r1h1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτο & χάρις 1 Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to finding **favor** with God, which is what he states in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this is deserving of Gods favor” or “this is pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ front:intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
2:25 i5lu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ποιμένα καὶ ἐπίσκοπον τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 Peter uses **shepherd** and **overseer** to refer to Jesus. Just as a **shepherd** protects his sheep and an **overseer** takes care of his workers, Jesus protects and takes care of those who trust in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who protects and takes care of your souls” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:25 z6q2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 See how you translated **souls** in [1:9](../01/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3:intro cqf4 0 # 1 Peter 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. How believers should act toward other people (2:113:12)\n2. How believers should endure suffering (3:134:6)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in [verses 1012](../03/10.md).\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “the spirits in prison”\n\n[Verse 19](../03/19.md) states that Jesus went and proclaimed to “the spirits in prison,” but does not mention what Jesus proclaimed or who those spirits are. [Verse 20](../03/20.md) states that these spirits disobeyed God during the time of Noah. Many scholars think that this means one of the following three meanings, each of which will be discussed in the notes for verses [19](../03/19.md) and [20](../03/20.md): (1) The spirits are demons who were imprisoned by God because they did something evil during Noahs time (see [2 Peter 2:45](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 67](../jud/01/06.md); [Genesis 6:14](../gen/06/01.md)). [Verse 19](../03/19.md) then means that Jesus went to the place where they are imprisoned and proclaimed his victory to them at some time between his death on the cross and his return to heaven. (2) The spirits are sinful human beings who died during the flood in Noahs time, and the prison is the realm of the dead. [Verse 19](../03/19.md) then means that Jesus went to hell and proclaimed his victory to those dead people there at some time between his death and resurrection. (3) The spirits are sinful human beings who died during the flood in Noahs time, but [verse 19](../03/19.md) refers to the pre-incarnate form of Jesus indirectly preaching the gospel to them through the preaching of Noah.\n\n### “Baptism now saves you”\n\nIn [verse 20](../03/20.md) Peter refers to the story of God rescuing Noah and his family from the flood “through water.” Then in [verse 21](../03/21.md) he states that the water is an “antitype” for baptism, which is a Christian ritual by which a person publicly identifies as a Christian. Then Peter makes the statement that baptism “now saves you.” Since the New Testament authors repeatedly state that God alone saves people and that no one can do any work to be saved, Peters statement cannot mean that a person can be saved by being baptized. Rather, Peter uses the word “baptism” to refer to the faith in Jesus that a person publicly confesses when that person is baptized. Peter indicates later in [verse 21](../03/21.md) that he is not referring to water baptism, which he describes as “the removal of dirt from the flesh.” Peter further states that the baptism he is referring to saves “through the resurrection of Jesus Christ,” which means that a person is saved by faith in Jesus, because Jesus rose from the dead.
3:1 p454 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 16](../03/01.md) Peter gives instructions specifically to women who are wives.
3:1 p454 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 16](../03/01.md) Peter gives instructions specifically to women who are wives.
3:1 wp5p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τινες ἀπειθοῦσιν τῷ λόγῳ 1 Here, **being disobedient to the word** could refer to: (1) refusing to believe the gospel message, as in [2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “some do not believe the message about Jesus” (2) disobeying the commands God gave in his word. Alternate translation: “some do not obey what God commands in his word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:1 kbis rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κερδηθήσονται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will win them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:1 bs56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κερδηθήσονται 1 Here, **won** is an idiom that means that the unbelieving husbands will become believers in Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they will be persuaded to believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ front:intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
3:5 jbuf ὑποτασσόμεναι τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν 1 See how you translated the similar clause in [verse 1](../03/01.md).
3:6 t3xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἧς ἐγενήθητε τέκνα 1 Peter uses a Hebrew idiom here in which people are said to be the **children** of someone who has qualities similar to theirs. Women who believe and who act like Sarah acted are thought of as if they were her actual **children**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “who resemble her as if you were her children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:6 v2so rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ φοβούμεναι μηδεμίαν πτόησιν 1 The phrase **not being afraid of any** translates two negative words in Greek. Peter uses them together to emphasize that believing women should not fear anything at all. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3:7 lbc2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse Peter gives instructions specifically to men who are husbands.
3:7 lbc2 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse Peter gives instructions specifically to men who are husbands.
3:7 uddn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun συνοικοῦντες & τῷ γυναικείῳ 1 Here, **the female** refers to the wives of the men to whom Peter is writing, not to one particular woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “live with the women whom you have married” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
3:7 lulz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ γνῶσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a knowledgeable way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:7 eq1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὡς ἀσθενεστέρῳ σκεύει 1 Here Peter refers to women as if they were **weaker** containers. The word **container** is a term used to refer to both men and women in the Bible ([Acts 9:15](../act/09/15.md)). Just as clay pots can break easily, so are human beings weak. Here Peter specifically refers to women as **weaker** containers because woman are usually physically weaker than men. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as with someone who is weaker than you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ front:intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
3:7 n4rf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς 1 Peter speaks of **the grace of life** as if it were something that people inherit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those who will experience the grace of life together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:7 quba rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession χάριτος ζωῆς 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that is **life**. The word **grace** refers to a gracious gift and **life** refers to eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the gracious gift, namely, eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:7 dwm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ μὴ ἐνκόπτεσθαι τὰς προσευχὰς ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that nothing will hinder your prayers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:8 nk97 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 812](../03/08.md) Peter writes instructions to all believers.
3:8 nk97 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 812](../03/08.md) Peter writes instructions to all believers.
3:8 f5y7 ὁμόφρονες 1 Alternate translation: “have the same opinion and be” or “have the same attitude and be”
3:8 tzgc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations φιλάδελφοι 1 Although **brothers** is masculine, Peter is using the phrase **loving as brothers** in a generic sense to refer to the kind of love that all believers should have for other believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “loving as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:9 z5u3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ ἀποδιδόντες κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ, ἢ λοιδορίαν ἀντὶ λοιδορίας 1 Peter uses **paying back** to refer to responding to the actions of another person as if one was returning money to that person for those actions. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not doing evil to someone who does evil to you or insulting someone who insults you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ front:intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
4:19 qm3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τὰς ψυχὰς 1 See how you translated **souls** in [1:9](../01/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
4:19 g1r6 ἐν ἀγαθοποιΐᾳ 1 Alternate translation: “while doing good” or “while continuing to do good deeds”
5:intro a6d9 0 # 1 Peter 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. How believers should interact with one another (5:111)\n2. Conclusion (5:1214)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Lion\n\nOther animals are usually afraid of lions because they are fast and strong, and they eat almost every other kind of animal. They also eat people. Satan wants to make Gods people afraid, so Peter uses the simile of a lion to teach his readers that Satan can harm their bodies, but if they trust in God and obey him, they will always be Gods people, and God will care for them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])\n\n### Babylon\n\nBabylon was the evil nation that had destroyed Jerusalem, taken the Jews away from their homes, and ruled over them. In other places in Scripture, the authors use Babylon as a metaphor for the enemies of Gods people. In [verse 13](../05/13.md) Peter uses Babylon as a metaphor for the nation that was persecuting the Christians to whom he was writing. Most scholars believe that here Peter is referring to Rome because the Romans were severely persecuting Christians there at that time. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:1 s8fr General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 14](../05/01.md) Peter speaks directly to men who are leaders in the churches.
5:1 s8fr 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 14](../05/01.md) Peter speaks directly to men who are leaders in the churches.
5:1 m4xr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρεσβυτέρους & ὁ συνπρεσβύτερος 1 In [verses 15](../05/01.md) the words **elder** and **elders** refer specifically to church leaders, who were often older men. Here these words do not refer to old men in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the fellow church leader … the church leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:1 n3em rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μάρτυς τῶν τοῦ Χριστοῦ παθημάτων 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **witness** and **sufferings**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “one who has witnessed Christ suffer in many ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5:1 a6ve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in the glory that God is about to reveal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ front:intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
5:4 qlek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive φανερωθέντος τοῦ ἀρχιποίμενος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the Chief Shepherd appears” or “when God reveals the Chief Shepherd” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:4 ll4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀμαράντινον τῆς δόξης στέφανον 1 Here,**crown** refers to a symbol of victory. It does not refer to the type of **crown** that kings wear. In ancient times an athlete would receive this **crown** as a reward for winning a competition. Those crowns were often made of leaves or flowers that would fade. Unlike those victory crowns, the reward that God gives will be **unfading**, which means that it will last forever. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a glorious reward that will last forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:4 c6h3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δόξης στέφανον 1 This could refer to: (1) a **crown** that is characterized by **glory**. Alternate translation: “glorious crown” (2) a **crown** that is the **glory** referred to in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “crown, that is, glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
5:5 qm2h General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse Peter first instructs younger men specifically and then continues to instruct all of the believers.
5:5 qm2h 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse Peter first instructs younger men specifically and then continues to instruct all of the believers.
5:5 z13n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑποτάγητε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “subject yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:5 bjt6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρεσβυτέροις 1 See how you translated **elders** in [verse 1](../05/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:5 uh4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντες 1 Here, **everyone** refers to all the believers to whom Peter is writing this letter, and not to all people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “every one of you believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
22 1:2 iam1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **Grace** and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “May God multiply his kind acts to you and give you a more peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
23 1:2 z7df rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 Peter speaks of **Grace** and **peace** as if they were objects that could increase in size or number. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor that means that these things will increase, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “May grace and peace increase in your lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
24 1:2 gj71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May God multiply grace and peace to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
25 1:3 y6aq General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to talk about the believers’ salvation and faith. [Verses 3–5](../01/03.md) are one sentence, but you may need to divide them into shorter sentences in your language.
26 1:3 l4vi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative εὐλογητὸς 1 Peter is using a statement to give an exhortation. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for exhortation. Alternate translation: “Let us bless” or “Let us praise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
27 1:3 z6wk rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
28 1:3 cyf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς 1 The words **our** and **us** are inclusive. They refer to Peter and those believers to whom he is writing. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
195 2:9 ra7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ ἐκ σκότους ὑμᾶς καλέσαντος, εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς 1 This clause refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, who called you from darkness into his marvelous light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
196 2:9 nvf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ σκότους & εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς 1 Here, **darkness** refers to the condition of people who do not know God and are sinful, and **light** refers to the condition of people who know God and are righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “from a life of sin and ignorance of God to a life of knowing and pleasing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
197 2:10 pveb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks οὐ λαὸς & λαὸς Θεοῦ & οὐκ ἠλεημένοι & ἐλεηθέντες 1 All four of these phrases are quotations from the Old Testament ([Hosea 1:6–10](../hos/01/06.md)). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate these quotations with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
198 2:11 jnr9 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to tell his readers how to live Christian lives.
199 2:11 ve9u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet παροίκους καὶ παρεπιδήμους 1 Here, **foreigners** and **exiles** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Christians on this earth are far away from their home in heaven. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “true exiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
200 2:11 x8af rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παροίκους 1 Peter uses **foreigners** here to refer to his Christian readers. Just like a foreigner is not in his homeland, so are Christians not at home while living on the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those living away from their home in heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
201 2:11 hjuk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παρεπιδήμους 1 See how you translated **exiles** in [1:1](../01/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
220 2:16 zqe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς ἐλεύθεροι 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. These words could be: (1) the command to submit to authorities stated in [verse 13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “submit as free people” (2) an implied imperative verb. Alternate translation: “act as free people” or “live as free people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
221 2:16 y9pg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὡς ἐπικάλυμμα & τῆς κακίας 1 Here, **covering** could refer to: (1) something to prevent people from knowing about one’s evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as a way to prevent others from seeing your evil” (2) an excuse or pretext to do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as an excuse to do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
222 2:17 gwy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν ἀδελφότητα 1 Here, **brotherhood** refers to all Christian believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the community of believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
223 2:18 w2nc General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to speak specifically to people who were slaves who worked in people’s houses.
224 2:18 xgk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς καὶ ἐπιεικέσιν 1 The words **good** and **gentle** mean similar things. Peter uses this repetition to emphasize that such masters treat their servants very kindly. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “to the very kind ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
225 2:18 mueb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς σκολιοῖς 1 Here, **crooked ones** is used to refer to people who act dishonestly or unjustly as if their morals were an object that could be bent or twisted. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the dishonest ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
226 2:19 r1h1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτο & χάρις 1 Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to finding **favor** with God, which is what he states in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this is deserving of God’s favor” or “this is pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
255 2:25 i5lu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ποιμένα καὶ ἐπίσκοπον τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 Peter uses **shepherd** and **overseer** to refer to Jesus. Just as a **shepherd** protects his sheep and an **overseer** takes care of his workers, Jesus protects and takes care of those who trust in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who protects and takes care of your souls” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
256 2:25 z6q2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 See how you translated **souls** in [1:9](../01/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
257 3:intro cqf4 0 # 1 Peter 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. How believers should act toward other people (2:11–3:12)\n2. How believers should endure suffering (3:13–4:6)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in [verses 10–12](../03/10.md).\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “the spirits in prison”\n\n[Verse 19](../03/19.md) states that Jesus went and proclaimed to “the spirits in prison,” but does not mention what Jesus proclaimed or who those spirits are. [Verse 20](../03/20.md) states that these spirits disobeyed God during the time of Noah. Many scholars think that this means one of the following three meanings, each of which will be discussed in the notes for verses [19](../03/19.md) and [20](../03/20.md): (1) The spirits are demons who were imprisoned by God because they did something evil during Noah’s time (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../jud/01/06.md); [Genesis 6:1–4](../gen/06/01.md)). [Verse 19](../03/19.md) then means that Jesus went to the place where they are imprisoned and proclaimed his victory to them at some time between his death on the cross and his return to heaven. (2) The spirits are sinful human beings who died during the flood in Noah’s time, and the prison is the realm of the dead. [Verse 19](../03/19.md) then means that Jesus went to hell and proclaimed his victory to those dead people there at some time between his death and resurrection. (3) The spirits are sinful human beings who died during the flood in Noah’s time, but [verse 19](../03/19.md) refers to the pre-incarnate form of Jesus indirectly preaching the gospel to them through the preaching of Noah.\n\n### “Baptism now saves you”\n\nIn [verse 20](../03/20.md) Peter refers to the story of God rescuing Noah and his family from the flood “through water.” Then in [verse 21](../03/21.md) he states that the water is an “antitype” for baptism, which is a Christian ritual by which a person publicly identifies as a Christian. Then Peter makes the statement that baptism “now saves you.” Since the New Testament authors repeatedly state that God alone saves people and that no one can do any work to be saved, Peter’s statement cannot mean that a person can be saved by being baptized. Rather, Peter uses the word “baptism” to refer to the faith in Jesus that a person publicly confesses when that person is baptized. Peter indicates later in [verse 21](../03/21.md) that he is not referring to water baptism, which he describes as “the removal of dirt from the flesh.” Peter further states that the baptism he is referring to saves “through the resurrection of Jesus Christ,” which means that a person is saved by faith in Jesus, because Jesus rose from the dead.
258 3:1 p454 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 1–6](../03/01.md) Peter gives instructions specifically to women who are wives.
259 3:1 wp5p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τινες ἀπειθοῦσιν τῷ λόγῳ 1 Here, **being disobedient to the word** could refer to: (1) refusing to believe the gospel message, as in [2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “some do not believe the message about Jesus” (2) disobeying the commands God gave in his word. Alternate translation: “some do not obey what God commands in his word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
260 3:1 kbis rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κερδηθήσονται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will win them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
261 3:1 bs56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κερδηθήσονται 1 Here, **won** is an idiom that means that the unbelieving husbands will become believers in Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they will be persuaded to believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
277 3:5 jbuf ὑποτασσόμεναι τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν 1 See how you translated the similar clause in [verse 1](../03/01.md).
278 3:6 t3xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἧς ἐγενήθητε τέκνα 1 Peter uses a Hebrew idiom here in which people are said to be the **children** of someone who has qualities similar to theirs. Women who believe and who act like Sarah acted are thought of as if they were her actual **children**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “who resemble her as if you were her children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
279 3:6 v2so rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ φοβούμεναι μηδεμίαν πτόησιν 1 The phrase **not being afraid of any** translates two negative words in Greek. Peter uses them together to emphasize that believing women should not fear anything at all. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
280 3:7 lbc2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse Peter gives instructions specifically to men who are husbands.
281 3:7 uddn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun συνοικοῦντες & τῷ γυναικείῳ 1 Here, **the female** refers to the wives of the men to whom Peter is writing, not to one particular woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “live with the women whom you have married” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
282 3:7 lulz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ γνῶσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a knowledgeable way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
283 3:7 eq1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὡς ἀσθενεστέρῳ σκεύει 1 Here Peter refers to women as if they were **weaker** containers. The word **container** is a term used to refer to both men and women in the Bible ([Acts 9:15](../act/09/15.md)). Just as clay pots can break easily, so are human beings weak. Here Peter specifically refers to women as **weaker** containers because woman are usually physically weaker than men. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as with someone who is weaker than you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
285 3:7 n4rf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς 1 Peter speaks of **the grace of life** as if it were something that people inherit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those who will experience the grace of life together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
286 3:7 quba rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession χάριτος ζωῆς 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that is **life**. The word **grace** refers to a gracious gift and **life** refers to eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the gracious gift, namely, eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
287 3:7 dwm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ μὴ ἐνκόπτεσθαι τὰς προσευχὰς ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that nothing will hinder your prayers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
288 3:8 nk97 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 8–12](../03/08.md) Peter writes instructions to all believers.
289 3:8 f5y7 ὁμόφρονες 1 Alternate translation: “have the same opinion and be” or “have the same attitude and be”
290 3:8 tzgc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations φιλάδελφοι 1 Although **brothers** is masculine, Peter is using the phrase **loving as brothers** in a generic sense to refer to the kind of love that all believers should have for other believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “loving as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
291 3:9 z5u3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ ἀποδιδόντες κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ, ἢ λοιδορίαν ἀντὶ λοιδορίας 1 Peter uses **paying back** to refer to responding to the actions of another person as if one was returning money to that person for those actions. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not doing evil to someone who does evil to you or insulting someone who insults you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
431 4:19 qm3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τὰς ψυχὰς 1 See how you translated **souls** in [1:9](../01/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
432 4:19 g1r6 ἐν ἀγαθοποιΐᾳ 1 Alternate translation: “while doing good” or “while continuing to do good deeds”
433 5:intro a6d9 0 # 1 Peter 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. How believers should interact with one another (5:1–11)\n2. Conclusion (5:12–14)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Lion\n\nOther animals are usually afraid of lions because they are fast and strong, and they eat almost every other kind of animal. They also eat people. Satan wants to make God’s people afraid, so Peter uses the simile of a lion to teach his readers that Satan can harm their bodies, but if they trust in God and obey him, they will always be God’s people, and God will care for them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])\n\n### Babylon\n\nBabylon was the evil nation that had destroyed Jerusalem, taken the Jews away from their homes, and ruled over them. In other places in Scripture, the authors use Babylon as a metaphor for the enemies of God’s people. In [verse 13](../05/13.md) Peter uses Babylon as a metaphor for the nation that was persecuting the Christians to whom he was writing. Most scholars believe that here Peter is referring to Rome because the Romans were severely persecuting Christians there at that time. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
434 5:1 s8fr General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 1–4](../05/01.md) Peter speaks directly to men who are leaders in the churches.
435 5:1 m4xr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρεσβυτέρους & ὁ συνπρεσβύτερος 1 In [verses 1–5](../05/01.md) the words **elder** and **elders** refer specifically to church leaders, who were often older men. Here these words do not refer to old men in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the fellow church leader … the church leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
436 5:1 n3em rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μάρτυς τῶν τοῦ Χριστοῦ παθημάτων 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **witness** and **sufferings**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “one who has witnessed Christ suffer in many ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
437 5:1 a6ve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in the glory that God is about to reveal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
453 5:4 qlek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive φανερωθέντος τοῦ ἀρχιποίμενος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the Chief Shepherd appears” or “when God reveals the Chief Shepherd” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
454 5:4 ll4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀμαράντινον τῆς δόξης στέφανον 1 Here,**crown** refers to a symbol of victory. It does not refer to the type of **crown** that kings wear. In ancient times an athlete would receive this **crown** as a reward for winning a competition. Those crowns were often made of leaves or flowers that would fade. Unlike those victory crowns, the reward that God gives will be **unfading**, which means that it will last forever. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a glorious reward that will last forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
455 5:4 c6h3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δόξης στέφανον 1 This could refer to: (1) a **crown** that is characterized by **glory**. Alternate translation: “glorious crown” (2) a **crown** that is the **glory** referred to in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “crown, that is, glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
456 5:5 qm2h General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse Peter first instructs younger men specifically and then continues to instruct all of the believers.
457 5:5 z13n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑποτάγητε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “subject yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
458 5:5 bjt6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρεσβυτέροις 1 See how you translated **elders** in [verse 1](../05/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
459 5:5 uh4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντες 1 Here, **everyone** refers to all the believers to whom Peter is writing this letter, and not to all people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “every one of you believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

View File

@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
4:16 zxe7 ἐπίμενε αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate translation: “Continue to do these things”
4:16 u7ez καὶ σεαυτὸν σώσεις καὶ τοὺς ἀκούοντάς σου 1 This could mean: (1) Timothy will save himself and those who hear him from Gods judgment (2) Timothy will protect himself and those who hear him from the influence of false teachers. Perhaps Paul means both things since, if Timothy can persuade the people of the church in Ephesus not to listen to the false teachers, then he will also spare them from Gods judgment for the wrong things they would have done if they had listened to those teachers. Alternate translation: “you will keep both yourself and your listeners from believing and doing the wrong things”
5:intro jx4e 0 # 1 Timothy 5 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Honor and respect\n\nPaul encourages younger Christians to honor and respect older Christians. Cultures honor and respect older people in different ways.\n\n### Widows\n\nIn the ancient Near East, it was important to care for widows because they could not provide for themselves.\n\n### Variation in names\n\nIn this chapter, as in chapter 4, Paul speaks of church leaders called “elders.” Here, as well, they seem to be the same kind of leaders that he calls “overseers” in chapter 3.
5:1 wt5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul was giving these commands to one person, Timothy. Languages that have different forms of “you” or different forms for commands would use the singular form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
5:1 wt5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul was giving these commands to one person, Timothy. Languages that have different forms of “you” or different forms for commands would use the singular form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
5:1 l4w5 πρεσβυτέρῳ μὴ ἐπιπλήξῃς 1 Alternate translation: “Do not reprimand an older man”
5:1 dnf2 ἀλλὰ παρακάλει 1 Alternate translation: “instead, encourage him”
5:1 enp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς πατέρα, νεωτέρους ὡς ἀδελφούς 1 Paul uses these two similes to tell Timothy that he should treat fellow believers with the same sincere love and respect that he would show to family members. Alternate translation: “as if he were your own father, and encourage younger men as if they were your own brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
250 4:16 zxe7 ἐπίμενε αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate translation: “Continue to do these things”
251 4:16 u7ez καὶ σεαυτὸν σώσεις καὶ τοὺς ἀκούοντάς σου 1 This could mean: (1) Timothy will save himself and those who hear him from God’s judgment (2) Timothy will protect himself and those who hear him from the influence of false teachers. Perhaps Paul means both things since, if Timothy can persuade the people of the church in Ephesus not to listen to the false teachers, then he will also spare them from God’s judgment for the wrong things they would have done if they had listened to those teachers. Alternate translation: “you will keep both yourself and your listeners from believing and doing the wrong things”
252 5:intro jx4e 0 # 1 Timothy 5 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Honor and respect\n\nPaul encourages younger Christians to honor and respect older Christians. Cultures honor and respect older people in different ways.\n\n### Widows\n\nIn the ancient Near East, it was important to care for widows because they could not provide for themselves.\n\n### Variation in names\n\nIn this chapter, as in chapter 4, Paul speaks of church leaders called “elders.” Here, as well, they seem to be the same kind of leaders that he calls “overseers” in chapter 3.
253 5:1 wt5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul was giving these commands to one person, Timothy. Languages that have different forms of “you” or different forms for commands would use the singular form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
254 5:1 l4w5 πρεσβυτέρῳ μὴ ἐπιπλήξῃς 1 Alternate translation: “Do not reprimand an older man”
255 5:1 dnf2 ἀλλὰ παρακάλει 1 Alternate translation: “instead, encourage him”
256 5:1 enp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς πατέρα, νεωτέρους ὡς ἀδελφούς 1 Paul uses these two similes to tell Timothy that he should treat fellow believers with the same sincere love and respect that he would show to family members. Alternate translation: “as if he were your own father, and encourage younger men as if they were your own brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

View File

@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ front:intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In
1:1 eajo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
1:2 g6rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Many languages have different ways to offer good wishes as they greet. Paul greeted his letter recipients with a blessing. Use a form that would be a good wish or blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “We pray that God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” or “I wish you grace and peace from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “May the grace and peace of God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be your portion” or “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show grace and give peace to your hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
1:2 bv9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **Grace** and **peace**, you can express these ideas as verbs or in another way. Alternate translation: “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and give rest to your inner being” or “...be favorable to you and make you at ease” or “...be kind to you and set your heart at rest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 o6v9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 312, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
1:3 o6v9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 312, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
1:3 m6z5 εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν & πάντοτε 1 # General Information:\n\nPaul here uses the word **ought** to express that he has a moral obligation to God to **give thanks** for the believers in Thessalonica. Use a natural expression for this in your language. Alternate translation: “We are bound always to thank” or “We can do no other than to thank” or “We must give thanks continually to”
1:3 ea59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε 1 Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:3 o01t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί 1 If your readers might think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ front:intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In
1:12 z8k9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to how exceedingly kind our God and the Lord Jesus Christ are to you” or “as our God and the Lord Jesus Christ continue to abundantly bless you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:12 z1my τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase translated as **our God and the Lord Jesus Christ** could refer to: (1) two persons of the Trinity, God the Father and Jesus the Son. (2) one person, Jesus, who is both God and Lord. Alternate translation: “of our God and Lord, Jesus Christ”
2:intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 2 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Man of lawlessness\n\nThis person is also called “the son of destruction” and “the lawless one” in this chapter. He is not Satan, but he is empowered by Satan and is the leader of those who do Satans evil work in the world in the last days. He is certainly one of the “antichrists” mentioned by John (1 John 2:18) and may be the final one, described as a beast in Revelation 13. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])\n\n### Sits in the temple of God\n\nPaul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:1 r36t rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 112, Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back and warns them about the coming man of lawlessness. A heading for this section might be, “The Man of Lawlessness” or “The Deception before Jesus Returns.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
2:1 r36t rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 112, Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back and warns them about the coming man of lawlessness. A heading for this section might be, “The Man of Lawlessness” or “The Deception before Jesus Returns.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
2:1 q1uq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2:1 uy4z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 The **coming of our Lord Jesus Christ** and **our gathering to him** are two actions that happen at the same time. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “regarding the time of our Lord Jesus coming when we will be gathered together unto him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2:1 sx2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 If it is more natural in your language, you could use active verbs for the events of **coming** and **gathering**. Alternate translation: “about the time when our Lord Jesus will come and gather us to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ front:intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In
2:12 d63e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κριθῶσιν πάντες 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “God may judge all of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:12 pkw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ 1 Here, **the ones** refers back to the people that Paul has described with similar terms in verse 10. These are the same people who “did not receive the love of the truth” and instead accepted the “deceit of unrighteousness.” You may want to start a new sentence here and end what came before with a period. Alternate translation: “Those are the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:12 m1cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have not believed the true message but have enjoyed doing sinful things” or “those people who have rejected the true message about the Lord and instead have chosen to do what is wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:13 w83a rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul now changes topics. If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Paul gives thanks to God for the believers and encourages them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
2:13 w83a rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul now changes topics. If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Paul gives thanks to God for the believers and encourages them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
2:13 b3hh δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to indicate/show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section.
2:13 dze5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν & πάντοτε 1 The word **always** is a generalization. This is used to emphasize the importance of the action. If this is not natural in your language, you could use the alternative renderings given. Alternate translation: “we should continually give thanks” or “we must thank God at all times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2:13 m418 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν 1 Here, **we** refers to three men, Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ front:intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In
2:17 x3rr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 Here, the word **hearts** represents both the emotion and will of a person. If **hearts** does not mean this in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may he give comfort and strength to your livers” or “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:17 yw5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the phrase **work and word** with verbs. Alternative translation: “in every good thing that you do and say” or “so that you could do and say everything that is good.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3:intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 3 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Idle and lazy persons\n\nIn Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### What should you do if your brother sins?\n\nIn this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
3:1 k33i rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 15, Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions and encourages them. A heading for this section might be, “Pray for Us.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
3:1 k33i rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 15, Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions and encourages them. A heading for this section might be, “Pray for Us.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
3:1 jy75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Here, the word **Finally** marks a change in topic. To **pray** is not the final instruction that Paul gives but it is how Paul opens the last section of his letter where he will discuss a few remaining matters. Alternate translation: “One more thing” or “So, continuing on” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3:1 m1s5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:1 v8k2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **us** refers to Paul and his companions. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ front:intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In
3:5 wre3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of Gods **love** and Christs **endurance** as if they were destinations on a path. If your readers would not understand this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you and the endurance that Christ supplies you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:5 dzbn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **love of God** can mean (1) the love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you” or (2) the love that people give to God. Alternate translation: “to love God more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:5 ia7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **endurance of Christ** can mean (1) the endurance that Christ gives to his people. Alternate translation: “to experience the endurance that Christ gives you” or (2) the endurance that Christ had through his suffering. Alternate translation: “to know how much Christ has endured for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:6 mst3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 615, Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. A heading for this section might be, “Believers Must Work.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
3:6 mst3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 615, Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. A heading for this section might be, “Believers Must Work.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
3:6 v33v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3:6 x9l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί & ἀδελφοῦ 1 Here, the words **brothers** and **brother** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:6 y4a9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **name** stands for the person of Jesus Christ. It can also mean “with the authority of.” If using this term is not clear in your language, you could express it directly. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” or “with the authority that our Lord Jesus Christ has given us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ front:intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In
3:14 nv3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῦτον σημειοῦσθε 1 Paul wants the Thessalonians to notice who this person is. Alternate translation: “point out that person” or “make sure everyone knows who he is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:14 y552 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα ἐντραπῇ 1 Paul instructs believers to avoid lazy believers as a disciplinary action. If necessary, you could make this explicit to make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “in order that he will know that his laziness is wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:15 idj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφόν 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:16 nef4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 1618, Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica. A heading for this section might be, “Closing Remarks.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
3:16 nef4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 1618, Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica. A heading for this section might be, “Closing Remarks.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
3:16 z1zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3:16 whb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν 1 Paul ends the letter with blessings that are also prayers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord of peace himself may give you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
3:16 zl1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης 1 Here, **himself** emphasizes that the Lord is the source of peace and that he will personally give peace to believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
7 1:1 eajo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
8 1:2 g6rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Many languages have different ways to offer good wishes as they greet. Paul greeted his letter recipients with a blessing. Use a form that would be a good wish or blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “We pray that God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” or “I wish you grace and peace from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “May the grace and peace of God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be your portion” or “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show grace and give peace to your hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
9 1:2 bv9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **Grace** and **peace**, you can express these ideas as verbs or in another way. Alternate translation: “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and give rest to your inner being” or “...be favorable to you and make you at ease” or “...be kind to you and set your heart at rest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10 1:3 o6v9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 3–12, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
11 1:3 m6z5 εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν & πάντοτε 1 # General Information:\n\nPaul here uses the word **ought** to express that he has a moral obligation to God to **give thanks** for the believers in Thessalonica. Use a natural expression for this in your language. Alternate translation: “We are bound always to thank” or “We can do no other than to thank” or “We must give thanks continually to”
12 1:3 ea59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε 1 Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
13 1:3 o01t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί 1 If your readers might think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
61 1:12 z8k9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to how exceedingly kind our God and the Lord Jesus Christ are to you” or “as our God and the Lord Jesus Christ continue to abundantly bless you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
62 1:12 z1my τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase translated as **our God and the Lord Jesus Christ** could refer to: (1) two persons of the Trinity, God the Father and Jesus the Son. (2) one person, Jesus, who is both God and Lord. Alternate translation: “of our God and Lord, Jesus Christ”
63 2:intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 2 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Man of lawlessness\n\nThis person is also called “the son of destruction” and “the lawless one” in this chapter. He is not Satan, but he is empowered by Satan and is the leader of those who do Satan’s evil work in the world in the last days. He is certainly one of the “antichrists” mentioned by John (1 John 2:18) and may be the final one, described as a beast in Revelation 13. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])\n\n### Sits in the temple of God\n\nPaul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
64 2:1 r36t rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 1–12, Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back and warns them about the coming man of lawlessness. A heading for this section might be, “The Man of Lawlessness” or “The Deception before Jesus Returns.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
65 2:1 q1uq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
66 2:1 uy4z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 The **coming of our Lord Jesus Christ** and **our gathering to him** are two actions that happen at the same time. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “regarding the time of our Lord Jesus coming when we will be gathered together unto him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
67 2:1 sx2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 If it is more natural in your language, you could use active verbs for the events of **coming** and **gathering**. Alternate translation: “about the time when our Lord Jesus will come and gather us to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
115 2:12 d63e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κριθῶσιν πάντες 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “God may judge all of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
116 2:12 pkw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ 1 Here, **the ones** refers back to the people that Paul has described with similar terms in verse 10. These are the same people who “did not receive the love of the truth” and instead accepted the “deceit of unrighteousness.” You may want to start a new sentence here and end what came before with a period. Alternate translation: “Those are the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
117 2:12 m1cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have not believed the true message but have enjoyed doing sinful things” or “those people who have rejected the true message about the Lord and instead have chosen to do what is wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
118 2:13 w83a rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul now changes topics. If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Paul gives thanks to God for the believers and encourages them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
119 2:13 b3hh δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to indicate/show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section.
120 2:13 dze5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν & πάντοτε 1 The word **always** is a generalization. This is used to emphasize the importance of the action. If this is not natural in your language, you could use the alternative renderings given. Alternate translation: “we should continually give thanks” or “we must thank God at all times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
121 2:13 m418 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν 1 Here, **we** refers to three men, Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
143 2:17 x3rr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 Here, the word **hearts** represents both the emotion and will of a person. If **hearts** does not mean this in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may he give comfort and strength to your livers” or “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
144 2:17 yw5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the phrase **work and word** with verbs. Alternative translation: “in every good thing that you do and say” or “so that you could do and say everything that is good.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
145 3:intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 3 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Idle and lazy persons\n\nIn Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### What should you do if your brother sins?\n\nIn this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
146 3:1 k33i rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 1–5, Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions and encourages them. A heading for this section might be, “Pray for Us.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
147 3:1 jy75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Here, the word **Finally** marks a change in topic. To **pray** is not the final instruction that Paul gives but it is how Paul opens the last section of his letter where he will discuss a few remaining matters. Alternate translation: “One more thing” or “So, continuing on” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
148 3:1 m1s5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
149 3:1 v8k2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **us** refers to Paul and his companions. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
162 3:5 wre3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of God’s **love** and Christ’s **endurance** as if they were destinations on a path. If your readers would not understand this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you and the endurance that Christ supplies you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
163 3:5 dzbn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **love of God** can mean (1) the love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you” or (2) the love that people give to God. Alternate translation: “to love God more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
164 3:5 ia7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **endurance of Christ** can mean (1) the endurance that Christ gives to his people. Alternate translation: “to experience the endurance that Christ gives you” or (2) the endurance that Christ had through his suffering. Alternate translation: “to know how much Christ has endured for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
165 3:6 mst3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 6–15, Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. A heading for this section might be, “Believers Must Work.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
166 3:6 v33v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
167 3:6 x9l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί & ἀδελφοῦ 1 Here, the words **brothers** and **brother** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
168 3:6 y4a9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **name** stands for the person of Jesus Christ. It can also mean “with the authority of.” If using this term is not clear in your language, you could express it directly. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” or “with the authority that our Lord Jesus Christ has given us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
188 3:14 nv3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῦτον σημειοῦσθε 1 Paul wants the Thessalonians to notice who this person is. Alternate translation: “point out that person” or “make sure everyone knows who he is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
189 3:14 y552 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα ἐντραπῇ 1 Paul instructs believers to avoid lazy believers as a disciplinary action. If necessary, you could make this explicit to make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “in order that he will know that his laziness is wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
190 3:15 idj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφόν 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
191 3:16 nef4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/checking/headings General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 16–18, Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica. A heading for this section might be, “Closing Remarks.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings]])
192 3:16 z1zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
193 3:16 whb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν 1 Paul ends the letter with blessings that are also prayers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord of peace himself may give you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
194 3:16 zl1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης 1 Here, **himself** emphasizes that the Lord is the source of peace and that he will personally give peace to believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])

View File

@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
front:intro kwv9 0 # Introduction to 3 John\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 3 John\n\n1. Introduction (1:1)\n2. Encouragement and instructions to show hospitality (1:28)\n3. Diotrephes and Demetrius (1:912)\n4. Conclusion (1:1314)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 3 John?\n\nThe letter does not give the name of the author. The author only identified himself as **The elder** (1:1). The letter was probably written by the apostle John near the end of his life.\n\n### What is the Book of 3 John about?\n\nJohn wrote this letter to a believer named Gaius. He instructed Gaius to be hospitable to fellow believers who were traveling through his area.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “3 John” or “Third John.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Third Letter from John” or “The Third Letter John Wrote”. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is hospitality?\n\nHospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. In 2 John, John discouraged Christians from showing hospitality to false teachers. In 3 John, John encouraged Christians to show hospitality to faithful teachers.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How does the author use family relationships in his letter?\n\nThe author used the terms **brother** and **children** in a way that can be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **brothers** to refer to Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to Christians. Also, John called some believers his **children**. These were believers he taught to obey Christ.\n\nJohn also used the term **Gentile** in a way that could be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **Gentile** to refer to people who are not Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to those who did not believe in Jesus.
1:1 rni7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is a personal letter from John to Gaius. All instances of **you** and **your** refer to Gaius and are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:1 rni7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is a personal letter from John to Gaius. All instances of **you** and **your** refer to Gaius and are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:1 w99t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 **The elder** refers to John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as the **elder** either because of his old age or because he is a leader in the church. The name of the author can be made explicit: “I, John the elder, am writing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:1 lls6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Γαΐῳ 1 **Gaius** is a fellow believer to whom John is writing this letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:1 mp9w ὃν ἐγὼ ἀγαπῶ ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 Alternate translation: “whom I truly love”
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ front:intro kwv9 0 # Introduction to 3 John\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
1:12 mftm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὑπὸ αὐτῆς τῆς ἀληθείας 1 John leaves out words that are understood from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “he is borne witness to by the truth itself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:12 s712 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡμεῖς δὲ μαρτυροῦμεν 1 What John is confirming is implied and can be made explicit here. Alternate translation: “we also speak well of Demetrius” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:12 a16a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Here, **we** refers to John and those with him and does not include Gaius. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:13 v27c General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the end of Johns letter to Gaius. In this section, he mentions coming to see him and closes with a greeting.
1:13 v27c 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the end of Johns letter to Gaius. In this section, he mentions coming to see him and closes with a greeting.
1:13 am6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet οὐ θέλω διὰ μέλανος καὶ καλάμου σοι γράφειν 1 This is a doublet, because **ink and pen** stand for the process of writing that was already mentioned. John is not saying that he would write them with something other than ink and pen. He is saying that he does not wish to write these other things at all. Alternate translation: “I do not want to write about them to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:14 r8i4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom στόμα πρὸς στόμα 1 Here, **mouth to mouth** is an idiom meaning “in person.” Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:15 v8yj εἰρήνη σοι 1 Alternate translation: “May God give you peace”

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
2 front:intro kwv9 0 # Introduction to 3 John\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 3 John\n\n1. Introduction (1:1)\n2. Encouragement and instructions to show hospitality (1:2–8)\n3. Diotrephes and Demetrius (1:9–12)\n4. Conclusion (1:13–14)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 3 John?\n\nThe letter does not give the name of the author. The author only identified himself as **The elder** (1:1). The letter was probably written by the apostle John near the end of his life.\n\n### What is the Book of 3 John about?\n\nJohn wrote this letter to a believer named Gaius. He instructed Gaius to be hospitable to fellow believers who were traveling through his area.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “3 John” or “Third John.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Third Letter from John” or “The Third Letter John Wrote”. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is hospitality?\n\nHospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. In 2 John, John discouraged Christians from showing hospitality to false teachers. In 3 John, John encouraged Christians to show hospitality to faithful teachers.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How does the author use family relationships in his letter?\n\nThe author used the terms **brother** and **children** in a way that can be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **brothers** to refer to Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to Christians. Also, John called some believers his **children**. These were believers he taught to obey Christ.\n\nJohn also used the term **Gentile** in a way that could be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **Gentile** to refer to people who are not Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to those who did not believe in Jesus.
3 1:1 rni7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is a personal letter from John to Gaius. All instances of **you** and **your** refer to Gaius and are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
4 1:1 w99t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 **The elder** refers to John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as the **elder** either because of his old age or because he is a leader in the church. The name of the author can be made explicit: “I, John the elder, am writing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5 1:1 lls6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Γαΐῳ 1 **Gaius** is a fellow believer to whom John is writing this letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6 1:1 mp9w ὃν ἐγὼ ἀγαπῶ ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 Alternate translation: “whom I truly love”
40 1:12 mftm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὑπὸ αὐτῆς τῆς ἀληθείας 1 John leaves out words that are understood from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “he is borne witness to by the truth itself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
41 1:12 s712 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡμεῖς δὲ μαρτυροῦμεν 1 What John is confirming is implied and can be made explicit here. Alternate translation: “we also speak well of Demetrius” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
42 1:12 a16a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Here, **we** refers to John and those with him and does not include Gaius. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
43 1:13 v27c General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the end of John’s letter to Gaius. In this section, he mentions coming to see him and closes with a greeting.
44 1:13 am6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet οὐ θέλω διὰ μέλανος καὶ καλάμου σοι γράφειν 1 This is a doublet, because **ink and pen** stand for the process of writing that was already mentioned. John is not saying that he would write them with something other than ink and pen. He is saying that he does not wish to write these other things at all. Alternate translation: “I do not want to write about them to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
45 1:14 r8i4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom στόμα πρὸς στόμα 1 Here, **mouth to mouth** is an idiom meaning “in person.” Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
46 1:15 v8yj εἰρήνη σοι 1 Alternate translation: “May God give you peace”

View File

@ -2474,7 +2474,7 @@ front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
18:2 y97p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ποντικὸν 1 The word **Pontian** was the name for someone who came from the province of Pontus on the southern coast of the Black Sea. See how you translated the name “Pontus” in [2:9](../02/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:2 q11b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης 1 It might be more natural to keep all of the information about Aquila leaving Italy together and mention afterwards that Paul also met his wife Priscilla. Alternate translation: “having recently come from Italy because Claudius had ordered all the Jews to depart from Rome, and Priscilla, his wife” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
18:2 n95f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κλαύδιον 1 The word **Claudius** is the name of the man who was the Roman emperor at this time. See how you translated his name in [11:28](../11/28.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
18:5 r56h General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nSilas and Timothy rejoin Paul.
18:5 r56h 0 # General Information:\n\nSilas and Timothy rejoin Paul.
18:5 btkg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 Luke says that Silas and Timothy **came down** to Corinth because that city is lower in elevation than Macedonia. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:5 rjl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
18:5 vwj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke speaks of **the word** as if it were a living thing that could constrain Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])

Can't render this file because it is too large.

File diff suppressed because one or more lines are too long

File diff suppressed because one or more lines are too long

View File

@ -1392,7 +1392,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
21:1 xxf4 you must set before them 0 Yahweh continues speaking to Moses. There is no quote break between chapters.
21:1 hhf7 תָּשִׂ֖ים 1 Alternate translation: “you must give” or “you must tell”
21:1 ddql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 Here, **faces** represents the presence of the nation. Alternate translation: “before them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:2 di5z General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nHere Yahweh begins telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
21:2 di5z 0 # General Information:\n\nHere Yahweh begins telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
21:2 wj0e rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical כִּ֤י תִקְנֶה֙ עֶ֣בֶד עִבְרִ֔י 1 # General Information:\n\nThis is the first of many hypothetical situations, introduced by “when” or **if,** which you will encounter over the next several chapters. See the [introduction to chapter 21](../21/intro.md). You will need to translate these consistently in a manner that expresses that these situations have not happened. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
21:3 ln3r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אִם־בְּ⁠גַפּ֥⁠וֹ יָבֹ֖א בְּ⁠גַפּ֣⁠וֹ יֵצֵ֑א 1 What **by himself** means can be stated clearly. Some languages require that the additional condition, that he marries while a slave, be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “If he became a slave while he had no wife, and if he marries while he is a slave, the master need only free the man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:3 pfn3 בְּ⁠גַפּ֥⁠וֹ & בְּ⁠גַפּ֣⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “alone” or “without a wife”
@ -1463,7 +1463,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
21:36 ix8h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִשְׁמְרֶ֖⁠נּוּ בְּעָלָ֑י⁠ו 1 This means that the owner did not keep his ox safely where it could not wander to hurt other animals. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and its owner did not keep it inside a fence” or “and its owner did not tie it securely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:36 dcv2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שַׁלֵּ֨ם יְשַׁלֵּ֥ם שׁוֹר֙ תַּ֣חַת הַ⁠שּׁ֔וֹר 1 The owner of the ox that killed must give an ox to the man who lost his ox. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the owner of the ox that killed must surely give a living ox to the owner of the ox that died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:intro f9vb 0 # Exodus 22 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\nThis chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. We will not attempt to provide an outline since almost every verse is about a different case.\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nThroughout the case law a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” Then there is a description of the situation, and then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will contain these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (im).\n\n### Passive construction\n\nMany portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].
22:1 syx5 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
22:1 syx5 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
22:1 onm0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical כִּ֤י יִגְנֹֽב־אִישׁ֙ שׁ֣וֹר אוֹ־שֶׂ֔ה וּ⁠טְבָח֖⁠וֹ א֣וֹ מְכָר֑⁠וֹ 1 # General Information:\n\nThis is the first of many hypothetical situations in this chapter, introduced by “when” or **if,** which you will encounter over the next several chapters. See the [introduction](../22/intro.md). You will need to translate these consistently in a manner that expresses that these situations have not actually happened. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
22:1 bc03 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה & וְ⁠אַרְבַּע 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “5 … and 4” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
22:2 mt43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אִם־בַּ⁠מַּחְתֶּ֛רֶת יִמָּצֵ֥א הַ⁠גַּנָּ֖ב 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If anyone finds a thief while he is breaking in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -1526,7 +1526,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
22:30 m4wq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁמִינִ֖י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 8” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
22:31 jjhn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠אַנְשֵׁי־קֹ֖דֶשׁ תִּהְי֣וּ⁠ן לִ֑⁠י 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “And you shall be holy men to men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
23:intro hk5t 0 # Exodus 23 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\nThis chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. It also touches on the patterns of life regarding the Sabbaths ([verses 10-12](../23/10.md)) and Festivals ([verses 14-19](../23/14.md)). At [verse 20](../23/20.md) Yahweh begins telling them about their future as they go to and live in the promised land.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Celebrations of feasts and festivals\n\nThe people of Israel were required to celebrate certain feasts and festivals. These were part of the law of Moses, and some are described in this chapter. Their purpose was to worship Yahweh and to remember the great things Yahweh has done for them.
23:1 we1y General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
23:1 we1y 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
23:1 eeoc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֖א שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **report** and **emptiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You must not report emptily” or “You must not report falsely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
23:1 l4xr שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “a false testimony”
23:1 fu5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אַל־תָּ֤שֶׁת יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ עִם־רָשָׁ֔ע 1 Here, to **put your hand with the wicked** means to support the lies that he is telling in order to harm someone else. The image is of putting out your hand to help him, to make him stronger than he would be on his own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You must not assist the wicked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -1722,7 +1722,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
26:29 ji1j בָּתִּ֖ים לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “which will hold the crossbars” or “because they will hold the crossbars”
26:29 nq3m לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 The **crossbars** are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md).
26:30 csf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הָרְאֵ֖יתָ בָּ⁠הָֽר 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26:31 yqi6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
26:31 yqi6 0 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
26:33 p2yq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠קְּרָסִים֒ 1 The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
26:33 x28l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “the Most Holy Place” or “the Extraordinarily Holy Place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
26:34 u3tu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession בְּ⁠קֹ֖דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “in the Most Holy Place” or “in the Extraordinarily Holy Place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@ -1798,7 +1798,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
28:15 sf8e מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה חֹשֵׁ֔ב כְּ⁠מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה אֵפֹ֖ד תַּעֲשֶׂ֑⁠נּוּ 1 Alternate translation: “a skillful workman will make it like the ephod”
28:16 cny4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance זֶ֥רֶת & וְ⁠זֶ֥רֶת 1 You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A span is approximately 23 centimeters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
28:16 onj6 רָב֥וּעַ יִֽהְיֶ֖ה כָּפ֑וּל 1 Alternate translation: “Fold it in half so it will be square”
28:17 spd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nTwelve kinds of stones are listed in the next four verses. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:17 spd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown 0 # General Information:\n\nTwelve kinds of stones are listed in the next four verses. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:17 n1ys rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown אֹ֤דֶם פִּטְדָה֙ וּ⁠בָרֶ֔קֶת 1 These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
28:18 qq9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּ֖וּר הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֑י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And row 2:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
28:18 ga1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown נֹ֥פֶךְ סַפִּ֖יר וְ⁠יָהֲלֹֽם 1 These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@ -1912,7 +1912,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
29:35 yo59 כָּ֔כָה 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **thus** means “like this” and, as the next verses make clear, refers to the sacrificial ceremony outlined in this chapter which they must repeat seven times.
29:35 wrfs rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֥ת 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
29:35 c2si rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom תְּמַלֵּ֥א יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 # General Information:\n\nThis seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
29:36 r5tx General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse and the next explain the purpose of the sacrifice detailed in [verses 10-14](../29/10.md).
29:36 r5tx 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse and the next explain the purpose of the sacrifice detailed in [verses 10-14](../29/10.md).
29:36 s81n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal וּ⁠פַ֨ר חַטָּ֜את תַּעֲשֶׂ֤ה לַ⁠יּוֹם֙ עַל־הַ⁠כִּפֻּרִ֔ים וְ⁠חִטֵּאתָ֙ עַל־הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֔חַ בְּ⁠כַפֶּרְ⁠ךָ֖ עָלָ֑י⁠ו 1 # General Information:\n\nThe phrase **and you shall purify the altar by making atonement for it** describes the purpose of offering the bull. You may want to use a stronger connector. In languages that need to put purpose first, you may need to re-order the clauses. Alternate translation: “And you shall offer a bull of purification for atonement daily, thus you shall purify the altar, by making atonement for it.” or “You shall purify the altar by making atonement for it: you shall offer a bull of purification daily for its atonement.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
29:37 pq5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֔ים 1 Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
29:37 qk5h יִקְדָּֽשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “will also become set apart”
@ -1929,7 +1929,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
30:1 v8vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual וְ⁠עָשִׂ֥יתָ 1 Here, **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
30:2 w56e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown קַרְנֹתָֽי⁠ו 1 See how you translated **horns** in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
30:2 a39m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance אַמָּ֨ה & וְ⁠אַמָּ֤ה & וְ⁠אַמָּתַ֖יִם 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46cm … 46cm … 94cm (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
30:3 d3uu General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md), so see how you translated there.
30:3 d3uu 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md), so see how you translated there.
30:4 qyg4 to be attached to it 0 When translating this verse, you may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md), & [Exo 27:4](../27/04.md).
30:4 bvxi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְ⁠בָתִּ֣ים 1 Here, the word **housings** means that the rings will hold the poles. Since they are where the poles belong for use, they are their house. If you have a similar idiom meaning “place of belonging,” you may use it or you may translate the idea. Alternate translation: “a place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
30:6 ulvn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י & לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י 1 Here, **before the face of** means in front of. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -2217,7 +2217,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
34:10 s7uz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual עִמָּֽ⁠ךְ 1 Here, **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
34:11 xtkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy גֹרֵ֣שׁ מִ⁠פָּנֶ֗י⁠ךָ 1 Here, **from before your faces** means “ahead of you” or “on your behalf.” Yahweh is emphasizing who is doing the driving out. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
34:11 kfix rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֶת־הָ⁠אֱמֹרִי֙ וְ⁠הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִ֔י וְ⁠הַ⁠חִתִּי֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י וְ⁠הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִֽי 1 See how you translated these in [Exodus 33:2](../33/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
34:12 fmc9 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 12-16 are the first of these ten commandments. The original language is structured such that every clause in these verses is subordinate to the initial, **Guard yourself**. That sort of structure may not be possible in your language (as it is not in English).
34:12 fmc9 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 12-16 are the first of these ten commandments. The original language is structured such that every clause in these verses is subordinate to the initial, **Guard yourself**. That sort of structure may not be possible in your language (as it is not in English).
34:12 mnpv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns לְ⁠ךָ֗ 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **yourself** means that each Israelite should guard against committing these sins. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
34:12 n1il rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֖ה בָּ֣א עָלֶ֑י⁠הָ פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּ⁠קִרְבֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 # General Information:\n\nThis sentence contains two hypotheticals as a warning. Each is introduced by **lest**. Use a marker in your language that introduces a hypothetical situation, but also see the next note. Alternate translation: “If you were to cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land where you are about to go into, probably he would become as a trap in your midst.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
34:12 t1hz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֖ה בָּ֣א עָלֶ֑י⁠הָ פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּ⁠קִרְבֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 # General Information:\n\nThe second of these hypothetical statements is logically dependent on and follows after the first as a result. As you mark these hypotheticals, use a form that communicates that the second is a result of the first. Alternate translation: “because if you cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land where you are about to go into, then he will become as a trap in your midst” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
@ -2246,24 +2246,24 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
34:16 p98a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠הִזְנוּ֙ אֶת־בָּנֶ֔י⁠ךָ אַחֲרֵ֖י אֱלֹהֵי⁠הֶֽן 1 This is the climatic consequence of living in peace the nations God is driving out before them: complete apostacy from Yahweh and loss of the next generation to wickedness. Specifically it is the result of intermarriage with the pagans, which God has explicitly forbidden for this very reason. If your language marks the final consequence of a string of actions in a particular way it may be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “and in the end, they will cause even your sons to prostitute after their gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
34:17 lgab you will eat some of his sacrifice 0 The prohibition here is focused on making gods. In your translation make sure that the focus is not on the method, but the god-making.
34:17 rux0 מַסֵּכָ֖ה 1 See how you translated **molten metal** in [Exodus 32:4](../32/04.md).
34:18 s1rr General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md).
34:18 s1rr 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md).
34:18 u5be rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֨ת 1 Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
34:18 i5ck rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הָ⁠אָבִ֑יב & הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב 1 This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. **Aviv** is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated **Aviv** in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
34:19 ly7d General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 13:12](../13/12.md).
34:19 ly7d 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 13:12](../13/12.md).
34:20 sbrs buy back 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 13:13](../13/13.md).
34:20 j4tv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְ⁠שֶׂ֔ה & וַ⁠עֲרַפְתּ֑⁠וֹ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express explicitly that either the **lamb** or **donkey** must be killed, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34:20 c5ow לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה 1 Alternate translation: “you do not ransom the donkey”
34:20 yz8x כֹּ֣ל בְּכ֤וֹר בָּנֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ תִּפְדֶּ֔ה 1 Firstborn sons and firstborn donkeys belonged to Yahweh, but Yahweh did not want them sacrificed to Him. Instead, the Israelites were to sacrifice a lamb in their place. This allowed the Israelites to buy the donkeys and sons back from Yahweh.
34:20 u2p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹֽא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖⁠י רֵיקָֽם 1 Here understatement is used to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. This portion of the verse is identical to the end of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md). If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “come to me without a proper offering” or “always bring an offering to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
34:21 w9ed General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis command is similar to that in [Exodus 20:9](../20/09.md).
34:21 w9ed 0 # General Information:\n\nThis command is similar to that in [Exodus 20:9](../20/09.md).
34:21 n2ka rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 # General Information:\n\nIf your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
34:21 swm8 בֶּ⁠חָרִ֥ישׁ וּ⁠בַ⁠קָּצִ֖יר 1 Alternate translation: “Even when you are preparing the soil or gathering the crops”
34:22 lhxb Festival of Ingathering 0 This verse is similar to [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md), however the first festival is named **Festival of Weeks** here and “Festival of the Harvest” in 23:16.
34:22 d13l וְ⁠חַג֙ הָֽ⁠אָסִ֔יף 1 This festival celebrated the final harvesting of all the crops for the year. This festival was also known as the Festival of Shelters or the Festival of Booths. The idea came from the practice of the farmers living in temporary booths, or huts, out in the fields to guard the crop as it ripened. See Deuteronomy 16:13. See how you translated this in [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md). Alternate translation: “and the Festival of the Ingathering”
34:22 xqy4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor תְּקוּפַ֖ת הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה 1 Like “the exiting of the year” in [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md), this refers to the end of the year. Here, the year is pictured as something that can turn. Which, thinking of the planet, is highly astronomically accurate. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
34:23 zh58 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for **God of Israel** and dropping “to,” this verse is identical to [Exodus 23:17](../23/17.md).
34:23 zh58 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for **God of Israel** and dropping “to,” this verse is identical to [Exodus 23:17](../23/17.md).
34:23 iagy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יֵרָאֶה֙ & אֶת־פְּנֵ֛י הָֽ⁠אָדֹ֥ן 1 # General Information:\n\nHere to **appear before the face of the Lord Yahweh** means to gather to worship. **Before the face** is a metonym for Yahwehs presence, referring to worship. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
34:25 zx2v General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nSee the very similar [Exodus 23:18](../23/18.md).
34:25 zx2v 0 # General Information:\n\nSee the very similar [Exodus 23:18](../23/18.md).
34:25 e8v2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit דַּם־זִבְחִ֑⁠י 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the fact that the blood is from an animal explicitly. Alternate translation: “the blood of an animal that you sacrifice to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34:26 bv0a the blood of my sacrifice 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 23:19](../23/19.md).
34:27 x6j9 כִּ֞י עַל־פִּ֣י׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 Alternate translation: “for in accordance with these words” or “for according to these words”
@ -2285,23 +2285,23 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
35:2 c559 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day 7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
35:2 ax6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive שֵׁ֣שֶׁת יָמִים֮ תֵּעָשֶׂ֣ה מְלָאכָה֒ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Six days you shall work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
35:2 zij9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּל־הָ⁠עֹשֶׂ֥ה ב֛⁠וֹ מְלָאכָ֖ה יוּמָֽת 1 If your language would not use passive here, you could state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “You must execute anyone who works on that day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
35:4 jdb8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 4-9, Moses tells the Israelites to collect the things Yahweh commanded him to collect in [Exodus 25:2-7](../25/02.md). You should check your translation for consistency between these passages.
35:4 jdb8 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 4-9, Moses tells the Israelites to collect the things Yahweh commanded him to collect in [Exodus 25:2-7](../25/02.md). You should check your translation for consistency between these passages.
35:4 ugn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶל־כָּל־עֲדַ֥ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר זֶ֣ה הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה לֵ⁠אמֹֽר 1 # General Information:\n\nVerses 5-19 are a second-level direct quotation. If it would be better to reduce the quotation level in your language, you may want to make this introductory comment (everything after the first **saying**) an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Moses told all of the congregation of the sons of Israel the things that Yahweh commanded, saying,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
35:5 h5c8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 25:2-3](../25/02.md).
35:5 h5c8 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 25:2-3](../25/02.md).
35:5 n2c8 קְח֨וּ מֵֽ⁠אִתְּ⁠כֶ֤ם תְּרוּמָה֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “Take up a collection for Yahweh from what you have”
35:5 qq0a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis כֹּ֚ל 1 Here, “from” is omitted but suggested by the sentence grammar. Also, **every** means “every person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “from every person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
35:5 pqa2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כֹּ֚ל נְדִ֣יב לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 # General Information:\n\nThis is an idiom that indicates a persons desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom, though the body part often varies. Alternate translation: “from everyone who wants to give one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
35:5 gx87 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nAfter this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list.
35:6 r12v General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
35:5 gx87 0 # General Information:\n\nAfter this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list.
35:6 r12v 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
35:6 g615 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠תְכֵ֧לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 # General Information:\n\nThis could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or “thread” may be the best understanding. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
35:6 cad9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 # General Information:\n\nA bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
35:7 nmv4 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md).
35:7 nmv4 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md).
35:7 l5bq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מְאָדָּמִ֛ים 1 When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish. It is not clear if these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
35:7 wmsl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תְּחָשִׁ֖ים 1 The meaning of this word is not known; it may refer to some water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
35:7 tzrk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שִׂטִּֽים 1 A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
35:8 ikm4 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for several uses of the word **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:6](../25/06.md).
35:8 ikm4 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for several uses of the word **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:6](../25/06.md).
35:8 y11w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וּ⁠בְשָׂמִים֙ 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **spices** are made from parts of plants that people dry and then grind into a powder to put in oil or food, giving it a particular smell or flavor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
35:9 f1dd General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for an initial **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md).
35:9 f1dd 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for an initial **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md).
35:9 hcs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְ⁠אַ֨בְנֵי־שֹׁ֔הַם 1 # General Information:\n\nAn **onyx stone** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red, or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
35:9 kk7z וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֖י 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “and valuable gems for” or “and treasured gems for”
35:10 dc4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְ⁠כָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב 1 Here, **heart** and **spirit** are both referring to things innately possessed by a person, that is, traits of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftsman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “And every man with a skill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -2365,7 +2365,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
35:35 rcv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִלֵּ֨א אֹתָ֜⁠ם חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 Here, **skill** to create beautiful objects is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He has made them very skillful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
35:35 jvtd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 Here, **of heart** refers to possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with ability” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
36:intro nz4n 0 # Exodus 36 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n\r\n\r\n* v. 1: finish Moses instruction\r\n* v. 2-7: craftsmen collect materials from Moses, inform him the people should stop bringing things because they have too much already -v. 8-38: construction of the Dwelling, verse-by-verse quotations marked below\r\n * v. 8-18: quote [Exodus 26:1-11](../26/01.md)\r\n * v. 19-34: quote [Exodus 26:14-29](../26/14.md)\r\n * v. 35-36: quote [26:31-32](../26/31.md)\r\n * v. 37-38: quote [26:36-37](../26/36.md)\n\n## Translation issues\n\n* The first verse of this chapter goes with the last chapter.\n* Most of this chapter exactly quotes chapter 26 with a shift from instruction to past narrative form on the verbs and a few other minor changes; some are Hebrew word order that will be invisible here. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n* Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he**is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
36:1 ubk2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is the end of a quotation from Moses that begin in [35:30](../35/30.md). It should be connected as visually as possible to the previous verses, as the chapter break here is poorly placed.
36:1 ubk2 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is the end of a quotation from Moses that begin in [35:30](../35/30.md). It should be connected as visually as possible to the previous verses, as the chapter break here is poorly placed.
36:1 ds99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בְצַלְאֵ֨ל וְ⁠אָהֳלִיאָ֜ב 1 **Bezalel and Oholiab** are the names of men. See how you translated this in [Exodus 31:2](../31/02.md) and [31:6](../31/06.md) as well as in the end of [chapter 35](../35/30.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
36:1 y1h1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations אִ֣ישׁ 1 We know from [35:25](../35/25.md) that women were included in the skilled workers, so **man** means every person. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
36:1 tr3p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche חֲכַם־לֵ֗ב 1 Here, **of heart** refers to innately possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with innate ability” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@ -2388,81 +2388,81 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
36:6 k1qm מְלָאכָ֖ה 1 Here, **work** means the sorts of crafted items listed in the previous chapter.
36:6 utcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis מֵ⁠הָבִֽיא 1 In some languages you may need to provide an object for this sentence. Alternate translation: “from bringing contributions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
36:7 ipiu וְ⁠הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֗ה 1 Here, **work** means the sorts of crafted items listed in the previous chapter.
36:8 kw33 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for tense and the addition of **every skilled of heart among the doers of the work,** this verse is identical to [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
36:8 kw33 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for tense and the addition of **every skilled of heart among the doers of the work,** this verse is identical to [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
36:8 l7ub rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche כָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֜ב 1 See how you translated this in [35:21](../35/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
36:8 zz0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun עָשָׂ֥ה 1 Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he** used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “they made” or “a craftsman made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
36:9 p2mr General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 26:2](../26/02.md). Tense is implied.
36:10 z6sq General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:3](../26/03.md).
36:11 yw91 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:4](../26/04.md).
36:12 k1qq General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:5](../26/05.md).
36:9 p2mr 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 26:2](../26/02.md). Tense is implied.
36:10 z6sq 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:3](../26/03.md).
36:11 yw91 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:4](../26/04.md).
36:12 k1qq 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:5](../26/05.md).
36:13 z2zi General Information 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md).
36:14 m2ac General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:7](../26/07.md).
36:15 fa6i General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:8](../26/08.md).
36:16 wwj6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to the first sentence of [Exodus 26:9](../26/09.md).
36:17 qt9b General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:10](../26/10.md).
36:18 mq1j General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 26:11](../26/11.md). The difference is the absence of the middle clause from 26:11.
36:19 p3ke General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:14](../26/14.md).
36:20 t739 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:15](../26/15.md).
36:21 prx5 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 26:16](../26/16.md).
36:22 l8yx General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:17](../26/17.md).
36:23 ev65 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:18](../26/18.md).
36:24 ln2x General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
36:25 w2wz General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:20](../26/20.md).
36:26 gbm9 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 26:21](../26/21.md).
36:27 a7js General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:22](../26/22.md).
36:28 hw9c General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:23](../26/23.md).
36:29 u396 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:24](../26/24.md).
36:30 mu5n General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:25](../26/25.md).
36:14 m2ac 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:7](../26/07.md).
36:15 fa6i 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:8](../26/08.md).
36:16 wwj6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to the first sentence of [Exodus 26:9](../26/09.md).
36:17 qt9b 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:10](../26/10.md).
36:18 mq1j 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 26:11](../26/11.md). The difference is the absence of the middle clause from 26:11.
36:19 p3ke 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:14](../26/14.md).
36:20 t739 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:15](../26/15.md).
36:21 prx5 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 26:16](../26/16.md).
36:22 l8yx 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:17](../26/17.md).
36:23 ev65 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:18](../26/18.md).
36:24 ln2x 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
36:25 w2wz 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:20](../26/20.md).
36:26 gbm9 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 26:21](../26/21.md).
36:27 a7js 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:22](../26/22.md).
36:28 hw9c 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:23](../26/23.md).
36:29 u396 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:24](../26/24.md).
36:30 mu5n 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:25](../26/25.md).
36:30 r252 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שְׁנֵ֤י אֲדָנִים֙ שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָֽד 1 The list formula from [26:25](../26/25.md) is strangely shortened here but has the same meaning. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
36:31 cf2p General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md).
36:32 p4wd General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:27](../26/27.md).
36:33 h94y General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:28](../26/28.md).
36:34 i17v General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:29](../26/29.md).
36:35 pfc5 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:31](../26/31.md).
36:36 hg2q General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nAside from some verbal differences, this verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:32](../26/32.md).
36:37 r5ya General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md).
36:38 pr67 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:37](../26/37.md).
36:31 cf2p 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md).
36:32 p4wd 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:27](../26/27.md).
36:33 h94y 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:28](../26/28.md).
36:34 i17v 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:29](../26/29.md).
36:35 pfc5 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:31](../26/31.md).
36:36 hg2q 0 # General Information:\n\nAside from some verbal differences, this verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:32](../26/32.md).
36:37 r5ya 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md).
36:38 pr67 0 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:37](../26/37.md).
37:intro mt99 0 # Exodus 37 General Notes\n\n## Structure\r\n\r\n- v. 1-9 Making the ark, see [Exodus 25:10-20](../25/10.md)\r\n- v. 10-16 Making the table, see [Exodus 25:23-29](../25/23.md)\r\n- v. 17-24 Making the lampstand, see [Exodus 25:31-39](../25/31.md)\r\n- v. 25-28 Making the altar for incense, see [Exodus 30:1-5](../30/01.md)\r\n- v. 29 Making the oil and incense, see [Exodus 30:22-38](../30/22.md)\n\n## Potential translation issues\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the Dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahwehs instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
37:1 byr3 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:10](../25/10.md).
37:2 kb3s General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md).
37:3 pb6v General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:12](../25/12.md).
37:4 nr8y General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:13](../25/13.md).
37:5 v9j7 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:14](../25/14.md).
37:6 liw8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:17](../25/17.md).
37:7 nhi3 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md).
37:8 g96y General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:19](../25/19.md).
37:9 e6na General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:20](../25/20.md).
37:10 ktf8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:23](../25/23.md).
37:11 l2kv General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:24](../25/24.md).
37:12 i1ba General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:25](../25/25.md).
37:13 b56c General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:26](../25/26.md).
37:14 tc3u General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:27](../25/27.md).
37:15 zkr8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:28](../25/28.md).
37:16 h598 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:29](../25/29.md).
37:17 edx6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:31](../25/31.md).
37:18 kuh2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:32](../25/32.md).
37:19 g1y9 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:33](../25/33.md).
37:20 nl54 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:34](../25/34.md).
37:21 x1u5 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:35](../25/35.md).
37:22 ks9z General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:36](../25/36.md).
37:23 b2jq General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical with [Exodus 25:37-38](../25/37.md), excluding the purpose clause in v. 37 (“and it will hold up its lamps, and it will make light on the side of its face”).
37:24 uz5h General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:39](../25/39.md).
37:25 el8w General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 30:1-2](../30/01.md).
37:26 ep66 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 30:3](../30/03.md).
37:27 zez2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 30:4](../30/04.md).
37:28 hw37 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 30:5](../30/05.md).
37:29 c992 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nFor the **oil**, see [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md), and for the **incense** see [25:6](../25/06.md) and [30:35](../30/35.md).
37:1 byr3 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:10](../25/10.md).
37:2 kb3s 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md).
37:3 pb6v 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:12](../25/12.md).
37:4 nr8y 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:13](../25/13.md).
37:5 v9j7 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:14](../25/14.md).
37:6 liw8 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:17](../25/17.md).
37:7 nhi3 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md).
37:8 g96y 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:19](../25/19.md).
37:9 e6na 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:20](../25/20.md).
37:10 ktf8 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:23](../25/23.md).
37:11 l2kv 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:24](../25/24.md).
37:12 i1ba 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:25](../25/25.md).
37:13 b56c 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:26](../25/26.md).
37:14 tc3u 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:27](../25/27.md).
37:15 zkr8 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:28](../25/28.md).
37:16 h598 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:29](../25/29.md).
37:17 edx6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:31](../25/31.md).
37:18 kuh2 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:32](../25/32.md).
37:19 g1y9 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:33](../25/33.md).
37:20 nl54 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:34](../25/34.md).
37:21 x1u5 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:35](../25/35.md).
37:22 ks9z 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:36](../25/36.md).
37:23 b2jq 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical with [Exodus 25:37-38](../25/37.md), excluding the purpose clause in v. 37 (“and it will hold up its lamps, and it will make light on the side of its face”).
37:24 uz5h 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:39](../25/39.md).
37:25 el8w 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 30:1-2](../30/01.md).
37:26 ep66 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 30:3](../30/03.md).
37:27 zez2 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 30:4](../30/04.md).
37:28 hw37 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 30:5](../30/05.md).
37:29 c992 0 # General Information:\n\nFor the **oil**, see [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md), and for the **incense** see [25:6](../25/06.md) and [30:35](../30/35.md).
38:intro hp86 0 # Exodus 38 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the Dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahwehs instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency. Verses 1-20 of this chapter follow [Exodus 27:1-19](../27/01.md) almost verse for verse.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
38:1 r81c General Information 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:1](../27/01.md).
38:2 g71x General Information 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md).
38:3 v73t General Information 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:3](../27/03.md).
38:4 rx7v General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md) and [Exodus 27:5](../27/05.md). One part of 27:4 is rearranged into 38:5.
38:5 kp6w General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to the second half of [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md).
38:6 l258 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:6](../27/06.md).
38:7 ys63 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:7](../27/07.md) and the first part of [27:8](../27/08.md).
38:4 rx7v 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md) and [Exodus 27:5](../27/05.md). One part of 27:4 is rearranged into 38:5.
38:5 kp6w 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to the second half of [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md).
38:6 l258 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:6](../27/06.md).
38:7 ys63 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:7](../27/07.md) and the first part of [27:8](../27/08.md).
38:8 e6gd וַ⁠יַּ֗עַשׂ אֵ֚ת הַ⁠כִּיּ֣וֹר נְחֹ֔שֶׁת וְ⁠אֵ֖ת כַּנּ֣⁠וֹ נְחֹ֑שֶׁת 1 This portion is almost identical to [Exodus 30:18](../30/18.md).
38:8 mdx9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּ⁠מַרְאֹת֙ 1 The **bronze** came from the **mirrors.** If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the bronze mirrors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
38:9 clk6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 27:9](../27/09.md).
38:9 clk6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 27:9](../27/09.md).
38:10 nz6q General Information 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md).
38:11 mp6n General Information 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:11](../27/11.md).
38:11 xl4c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis מֵאָ֣ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 Here, “the curtains of the courtyard” and “long” are both omitted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the curtains of the courtyard were 100 cubits long” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@ -2501,36 +2501,36 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
39:intro mll6 0 # Exodus 39 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction in almost exact repetition of Yahwehs instructions. The special, holy clothing mentioned in previous chapters is produced to the correct specifications in this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\nBe sure to consult your previous work to maintain consistency. Verses 1-31 of this chapter follow [Exodus 28:1-37](../28/01.md) with some differences. Verses 33-41 follow [35:10-19](../35/10.md).\n- Throughout the chapter the people making the items are referred to interchangeably as **he** or **they**. Both are generic nouns referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could change all instances to “they” or “he” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
39:1 h8kg as Yahweh had commanded Moses 0 See how you translated similar instructions in [Exodus 28:4-5](../28/04.md).
39:1 e1xh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בִּגְדֵ֤י הַ⁠קֹּ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in [28:2](../28/02.md). Alternate translation: “the holy clothes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
39:2 b9mg General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:6](../28/06.md).
39:2 b9mg 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:6](../28/06.md).
39:4 pq62 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [28:7](../28/07.md).
39:5 g75w General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:8](../28/08.md).
39:6 k7vw General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 28:9](../28/09.md) and especially [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md). Here, as there, the **sons of Israel** literally means the twelve sons, Rueben through Benjamin, not the Israelite nation.
39:7 ize6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to the first half of [Exodus 28:12](../28/12.md).
39:8 mlf6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:15](../28/15.md); a few words are omitted here.
39:9 lkt1 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:16](../28/16.md); a few words are added or repeated here.
39:5 g75w 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:8](../28/08.md).
39:6 k7vw 0 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 28:9](../28/09.md) and especially [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md). Here, as there, the **sons of Israel** literally means the twelve sons, Rueben through Benjamin, not the Israelite nation.
39:7 ize6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to the first half of [Exodus 28:12](../28/12.md).
39:8 mlf6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:15](../28/15.md); a few words are omitted here.
39:9 lkt1 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:16](../28/16.md); a few words are added or repeated here.
39:10 m54c They set in it 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:17](../28/17.md).
39:11 qx96 an emerald, a sapphire, and a diamond 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 28:18](../28/18.md).
39:12 kk8t a jacinth, an agate, and an amethyst 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 28:19](../28/19.md).
39:13 l9wa a beryl, an onyx, and a jasper 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:20](../28/20.md).
39:14 z5va General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:21](../28/21.md).
39:15 byz8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:22](../28/22.md).
39:16 b8m6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:23-24](../28/23.md).
39:17 w2s4 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:24](../28/24.md).
39:18 bw76 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 28:25](../28/25.md) except for verb tense.
39:19 nd41 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 28:26](../28/26.md) except for verb tense.
39:20 w8wz General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 28:27](../28/27.md) except for verb tense.
39:21 zu91 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:28](../28/28.md) except for the note about Yahwehs command.
39:22 vdw1 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 28:31-32](../28/31.md).
39:23 cyc1 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:32](../28/32.md).
39:24 eak6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to part of [Exodus 28:33](../28/33.md).
39:25 sx9b General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to parts of [Exodus 28:33](../28/33.md).
39:26 gtg5 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThe first part of this verse is almost identical to the first part of [Exodus 28:34](../28/34.md).
39:27 pz63 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order.
39:14 z5va 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:21](../28/21.md).
39:15 byz8 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:22](../28/22.md).
39:16 b8m6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:23-24](../28/23.md).
39:17 w2s4 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:24](../28/24.md).
39:18 bw76 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 28:25](../28/25.md) except for verb tense.
39:19 nd41 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 28:26](../28/26.md) except for verb tense.
39:20 w8wz 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 28:27](../28/27.md) except for verb tense.
39:21 zu91 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:28](../28/28.md) except for the note about Yahwehs command.
39:22 vdw1 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 28:31-32](../28/31.md).
39:23 cyc1 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:32](../28/32.md).
39:24 eak6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to part of [Exodus 28:33](../28/33.md).
39:25 sx9b 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to parts of [Exodus 28:33](../28/33.md).
39:26 gtg5 0 # General Information:\n\nThe first part of this verse is almost identical to the first part of [Exodus 28:34](../28/34.md).
39:27 pz63 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order.
39:28 um4e turban 0 Verses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order.
39:29 hn5g sash 0 Verses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order.
39:30 kq33 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical [Exodus 28:36](../28/36.md). See [29:6](../29/06.md) for the **crown of holiness**.
39:31 fml2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:37](../28/37.md).
39:32 jh64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse marks the end of the narrative of the construction of the Dwelling. More precisely, it seems to mark the beginning of an ending section. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
39:30 kq33 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical [Exodus 28:36](../28/36.md). See [29:6](../29/06.md) for the **crown of holiness**.
39:31 fml2 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:37](../28/37.md).
39:32 jh64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse marks the end of the narrative of the construction of the Dwelling. More precisely, it seems to mark the beginning of an ending section. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
39:32 z1z7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 The **tabernacle** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing. The two interchangeable terms are brought together here in a poetic doubling to bring this part of the narrative to a close. If your readers would find this confusing you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST. Alternate translation: “holy meeting tent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
39:32 et19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וַֽ⁠יַּעֲשׂוּ֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כְּ֠⁠כֹל אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֖ה כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ 1 Here, **thus they did** parallels the whole rest of the sentence. Like the doubling of the terms for **tabernacle** this brings the narrative of building to an emphatic conclusion. If this sort of parallelism would convey a meaning other than this emphatic conclusion in your language you may need to use another natural way to close the narrative with emphasis on the Israelites complete obedience. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel faithfully did exactly according to all that Yahweh had commanded Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
39:33 ri54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent So the work on the Dwelling, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything 0 This verse starts a short narrative of the Israelites bringing and presenting the items for the Dwelling to Moses for inspection. It is a summary of the construction and extended conclusion to the last few chapters. Your team may need to decide how to group verse 32, as it both closes the construction narrative and introduces this next section, which ends with a very similar summary statement in [verses 42-43](../39/42.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
@ -2558,8 +2558,8 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
40:6 o5sz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֕י 1 Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
40:6 nqha rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֥ן אֹֽהֶל־מוֹעֵֽד 1 These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
40:10 yiq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִֽׁים 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
40:12 gqld General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 12-15 are similar to [Exodus 29:4-9](../29/04.md).
40:16 xl61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis statement starts a new section in which Moses does all the things **just as Yahweh had commanded**; this poetic obedience statement was seen so often in the previous chapter. You may wish to mark this transition and poetic statement in a particular way in your language that is similar to how you did in the last chapter. See [39:32](../39/32.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
40:12 gqld 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 12-15 are similar to [Exodus 29:4-9](../29/04.md).
40:16 xl61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent 0 # General Information:\n\nThis statement starts a new section in which Moses does all the things **just as Yahweh had commanded**; this poetic obedience statement was seen so often in the previous chapter. You may wish to mark this transition and poetic statement in a particular way in your language that is similar to how you did in the last chapter. See [39:32](../39/32.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
40:17 r6pc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הוּקַ֖ם הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן 1 The use of the passive here indicates that the important thing is the completion of the task of setting up the tent on the specific date Yahweh had commanded. If your language would show that focus in a different way, use a natural form to do that. Alternate translation: “that they set up the Dwelling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
40:17 gzu5 בַּ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּ⁠שָּׁנָ֥ה הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. See [Exodus 12:2](../12/02.md).
40:17 wnh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּ⁠שָּׁנָ֥ה הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “in month one, year two, on day one of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])

Can't render this file because it is too large.

View File

@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
1:26 aupp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰωάννης λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “John answered them, and he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1:27 x2ki rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος 1 Here, John is speaking about Jesus. The phrase **coming after me** means that Johns ministry has already started and Jesus ministry will start later. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who starts his ministry after I have done so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:27 y7v5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μου & οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ἄξιος, ἵνα λύσω αὐτοῦ τὸν ἱμάντα τοῦ ὑποδήματος 1 Untying sandals was the work of a slave or servant. John the Baptist uses this expression figurative to refer to the most unpleasant work of a servant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “me. I am not even worthy to untie the strap of his sandal” or “me, whom I am not worthy to serve in even the most unpleasant way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:28 r4ty rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse provides background information about the setting of the story that is recorded in [1:1927](../01/19.md). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1:28 r4ty rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse provides background information about the setting of the story that is recorded in [1:1927](../01/19.md). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1:28 u0iq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to the events that were described in [1:1927](../01/19.md). If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This conversation between John and the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:28 f5he rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 Here, **beyond the Jordan** refers to the region of Judea that is on the east side of the Jordan River, which is the side opposite from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “on the side of the Jordan River opposite from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:28 ryi1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰωάννης 1 Here, **John** refers to Jesus cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
1:39 k5m2 μένει 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.
1:39 ydqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν ἡμέραν ἐκείνην 1 Here, **that day** refers to the day the two disciples left John the Baptist to follow Jesus, as indicated in verse [35](../01/35.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same day that they left John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:39 tb9j ὥρα & δεκάτη 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six oclock in the morning. Here, **the tenth hour** indicates a time in the late afternoon, before dark, at which it would be too late to start traveling to another town. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “about 4:00 PM”
1:40 x8g8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses [4042] give background information about Andrew and how he brought his brother Peter to Jesus.
1:40 x8g8 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses [4042] give background information about Andrew and how he brought his brother Peter to Jesus.
1:40 f6b9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 Here, **John** refers to Jesus cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:40 jmyp Σίμωνος Πέτρου 1 **Simon** was also called **Peter** by Jesus, as recorded in verse [42](../01/42.md). Alternate translation: “Simon, who is also called Peter”
1:41 xpi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 **This one** here refers to Andrew, who was mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Andrew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
2:19 mp6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν 1 This is an imperative, but it should be translated as introducing a hypothetical situation rather than as a command. Jesus is stating a hypothetical situation in which the event in the second clause would happen if the event in the first clause took place. In this case, Jesus would certainly **raise** the **temple** up if the Jewish authorities were to **destroy** it. Alternate translation: “If you destroy this temple, then in three days I will raise it up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2:19 of4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν 1 Here, John records Jesus using the words **Destroy** and **raise** to describe his killing and resurrection, as if tearing down and rebuilding a building. However, the Jewish leaders did not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to them. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2:20 qb4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion σὺ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερεῖς αὐτόν? 1 The Jewish leaders are using the question form for emphasis. They think that Jesus wants to tear down the temple and rebuild it in three days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly rebuild it in three days!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:21 g6jx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 2122](../02/21.md) are a comment John made about the story that was described in [2:1320](../02/13.md). These verses tell about something that happened later. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2:21 g6jx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 2122](../02/21.md) are a comment John made about the story that was described in [2:1320](../02/13.md). These verses tell about something that happened later. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2:21 b440 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνος δὲ ἔλεγεν 1 Here, **that one** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But Jesus was speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:22 oznm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Therefore** indicates that in this verse John is giving the result of Jesus making the statement in [2:19](../02/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus said this about his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:22 jejg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠγέρθη ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
5:47 b8dd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν πιστεύσετε? 1 Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you will certainly never believe my words!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5:47 x7h9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν 1 Here, **words** refers to what Jesus said to these Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what I have told you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:intro xe4t 0 # John 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus fourth sign: Jesus feeds a large crowd (6:114)\n2. Jesus fifth sign: Jesus walks on the Sea of Galilee (6:1521)\n3. Jesus says he is the bread of life (6:2271)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### King\n\nThe king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food. They thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his peoples sins and that the world would persecute his people.\n\n## Important Metaphors in this Chapter\n\n### Bread\n\nBread was the most common and important food in Jesus day, so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread, because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted the people to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life, just as people need food to sustain physical life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])\n\n### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood\n\nWhen Jesus said, “unless you would eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would drink his blood, you do not have life in yourselves,” he was speaking of believing in his sacrificial death on the cross for the forgiveness of sins. He also knew that before he died he would tell his followers to commemorate this sacrifice by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand to what the metaphor referred. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Parenthetical ideas\n\nSeveral times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some background information needed to better understand the story. These explanations are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. This information is placed inside parentheses.\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
6:1 qhj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nJesus had traveled from Jerusalem to Galilee. A crowd has followed him up a mountainside. Verses [14](../06/01.md) tell the setting of this part of the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
6:1 qhj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nJesus had traveled from Jerusalem to Galilee. A crowd has followed him up a mountainside. Verses [14](../06/01.md) tell the setting of this part of the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
6:1 el4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 This phrase, **After these things**, introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
6:1 z345 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς θαλάσσης τῆς Γαλιλαίας τῆς Τιβεριάδος 1 The **Sea of Galilee** was called by several names, one of which was Sea **of Tiberias**. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/seaofgalilee]]) If having two different names for the same place would be confusing in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Sea of Galilee (also known as the Sea of Tiberias)” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:2 ebel rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ὄχλος πολύς 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
@ -922,7 +922,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
6:70 m9ys rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς τοὺς δώδεκα ἐξελεξάμην, καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν εἷς διάβολός ἐστιν? 1 Jesus gives this remark in the form of a question in order to emphasize that one of the twelve disciples will betray him. Alternate translation: “I chose you, the Twelve, myself, and one of you is a devil!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:70 k335 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated **the Twelve** in verse [67](../06/67.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
6:70 jl5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξ ὑμῶν εἷς διάβολός ἐστιν 1 The word **devil** could mean: (1) one of Jesus twelve disciples was a wicked person whose thoughts and actions resembled those of the **devil** or was being influenced or controlled by the **devil**. It does not mean that this person actually was the devil in human form. It also does not imply that there is more than one devil. Alternate translation: “one of you is wicked like the devil” or “one of you is controlled by the devil” (2) one of Jesus twelve disciples was speaking harmful and untrue things about Jesus to others. This meaning is possible because the word translated **devil** can also mean “slanderer.” Alternate translation: “one of you is a slanderer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:71 z9yc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John provides background information about what Jesus said in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
6:71 z9yc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John provides background information about what Jesus said in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
6:71 joha rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰούδαν Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτου 1 **Judas** and **Simon** are names of two men. This **Simon** is not the same as Simon Peter. **Iscariot** is a distinguishing term that most likely means he came from the village of Kerioth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:71 lttr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν δώδεκα 1 See how you translated **the Twelve** in verse [67](../06/67.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
7:intro l712 0 # John 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus goes to Jerusalem for the Festival of Shelters (7:113)\n2. Jesus says his authority is from God (7:1424)\n3. Jesus says he came from God (7:2531)\n4. Jesus says he will return to God (7:3236)\n5. Jesus says he is the living water (7:3739)\n6. The people disagree about who Jesus is (7:4044)\n7. The Jewish leaders disagree about who Jesus is (7:4553)\n\nTranslators may wish to include a note at [verse 53](../07/53.md) to explain to the reader why they have chosen or chosen not to translate [verses 7:538:11](../07/53.md). These verses are not in the best and oldest ancient manuscripts. If the translators have chosen to translate these verses, then they will want to either put them in a footnote outside of the main text or mark them in some way, such as square brackets ([ ]), to indicate that the passage may not have originally been in Johns Gospel.\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Believing in him”\n\nA recurring theme in this chapter is the concept of believing Jesus to be the Messiah. Some people believed he was the Messiah, while others did not. Some were willing to recognize his power and even the possibility that he was a prophet, but most were unwilling to believe that he was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])\n\n### “My time has not yet come”\n\nThis phrase and “his hour had not yet come” are used in this chapter to indicate that Jesus is in control of the events that are happening in his life.\n\n### “Living water”\n\nThis is an important metaphor used in the New Testament to refer to the Holy Spirit. See the discussion of this metaphor in the note about “living water” for [4:10](../04/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Prophecy\n\nIn [verses 3334](../07/33.md) Jesus gives a prophecy about his return to heaven without explicitly indicating his statement as prophecy.\n\n### Irony\n\nNicodemus explains to the other Pharisees that the Law requires them to hear directly from a person before making a judgment about that person. The Pharisees in turn made a judgment about Jesus without speaking to Jesus.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “Did not believe in him”\n\nJesus brothers did not believe that Jesus was the Messiah at the time the events in this chapter took place. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])\n\n### “The Jews”\n\nThis term is used in two different ways in this passage. It is used specifically to refer to the Jewish leaders who opposed Jesus and were trying to kill him ([7:1](../07/01.md), [11](../07/11.md), [13](../07/13.md), [15](../07/15.md), [35](../07/35.md)). It is also used in [verse 2](../07/02.md) to refer to Jewish people in general. The translator may wish to use the terms “Jewish leaders” and “Jewish people” to clarify this distinction.
@ -1025,7 +1025,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
7:36 ib6p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τίς ἐστιν ὁ λόγος οὗτος ὃν εἶπε 1 Here, **word** is used to refer to the meaning of the message that Jesus had shared. The Jewish leaders had failed to understand that message. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What was he talking about when he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:36 h18z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἶπε, ζητήσετέ με, καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετέ; καὶ ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
7:36 dyy1 ζητήσετέ με, καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετέ; καὶ ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν 1 See how you translated this in verse [34](../07/34.md).
7:37 elc6 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nAbout three or four days has passed since the events described in verses [1436](../07/14.md). It is now the last day of the Festival of Shelters, and Jesus speaks to the crowd.
7:37 elc6 0 # General Information:\n\nAbout three or four days has passed since the events described in verses [1436](../07/14.md). It is now the last day of the Festival of Shelters, and Jesus speaks to the crowd.
7:37 n3um rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations ἔκραξεν λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “cried out, and he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
7:37 ipem ἔκραξεν 1 See how you translated this phrase in verse [28](../07/28.md).
7:37 iy9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐάν τις διψᾷ 1 Here Jesus uses **thirst** to refer to a persons need for God, just as someone would **thirst** for water. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “If anyone who recognizes their need for God is like a thirsty person who desires water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -1038,7 +1038,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
7:38 y1zb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὕδατος ζῶντος 1 Here, **living** is used to mean “giving eternal life” or “causing people to live forever.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of water that gives eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:38 ebk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **his** could refer to: (1) the person who believes in Jesus. This meaning is used in most Bible translations and assumes that a new sentence begins at the beginning of this verse. Alternate translation, as in the ULT: “his” (2) Jesus. This meaning is used in some ancient church writings and assumes that the sentence at the end of the previous verse continues into through **the one believing in me** in this verse. Alternate translation: “my” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:38 cx1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ 1 Here the **stomach** is used to refer to the non-physical part of a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from inside of him” or “from his heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:39 i8wx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John gives information to clarify what Jesus was talking about in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
7:39 i8wx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John gives information to clarify what Jesus was talking about in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
7:39 qbr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὔπω & ἦν Πνεῦμα 1 John implies here that **the Spirit** would later come to dwell in those who trusted in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Spirit had not yet come to dwell in the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:39 n599 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐδέπω ἐδοξάσθη 1 Here the word **glorified** could refer to: (1) the time when Jesus would die on the cross and rise from the dead (see John [12:23](../12/23.md)). Alternate translation: “had not yet been crucified and resurrected” (2) the time when Jesus would ascend to his Father in heaven. [Acts 12](../act/01/01.md) records the Holy Spirit coming after Jesus went up to heaven. Alternate translation: “had not yet returned to God in glory” (3) both the crucifixion, resurrection, and ascension of Jesus. Alternate translation: “had not yet been glorified by his death, resurrection, and return to heaven” See the discussion of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:40 xvts rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential οὖν 1 **Then** here indicates that what follows is the continuation of the narrative from [verse 38](../07/38.md), which John had interrupted with background information in [verse 39](../07/39.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could show reference to earlier events by translating this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After Jesus had said this about the Holy Spirit,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
@ -1069,9 +1069,9 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
7:52 k6pg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐραύνησον καὶ ἴδε 1 Here, John records the Jewish leaders leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the missing words from the context. Alternate translation: “Look carefully and read what is written in the Scriptures to learn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7:52 jm59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προφήτης ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας οὐκ ἐγείρεται 1 The Jewish leaders believed that Jesus came **from Galilee** and that no **prophet** in the scriptures came **from Galilee**. Therefore, based on their reasoning, Jesus could not be a **prophet**. However, what they believed was incorrect. Jesus did not originally come from Galilee, but Bethlehem in Judea. Also, the prophet Jonah came **from Galilee** ([2 Kings 14:25](../2ki/14/25.md)) and [Isaiah 9:17](../isa/09/01.md) said that the Messiah would be a great light rising from Galilee. If your readers might not understand what the Jewish leaders are implying, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “no prophet rises up from Galilee, so this man cannot be a true prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:52 i0im ἐγείρεται 1 Here, **rises up** means to appear. Alternate translation: “appears”
7:53 s5fi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThe best early texts do not have [7:538:11](../07/53.md). The ULT has set them apart in square brackets ([ ]) to show that John probably did not include them in his original text. See the discussion of this textual issue in the General Notes to this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
7:53 s5fi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants 0 # General Information:\n\nThe best early texts do not have [7:538:11](../07/53.md). The ULT has set them apart in square brackets ([ ]) to show that John probably did not include them in his original text. See the discussion of this textual issue in the General Notes to this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
8:intro e667 0 # John 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus forgives the adulterous woman [8:111](../08/01.md)\n2. Jesus says he is the light of the world (8:1220)\n3. Jesus says he came from above (8:2130)\n4. Jesus says he frees people from sin (8:3136)\n5. Jesus describes the true children of Abraham and the children of Satan (8:3747)\n6. Jesus is greater than Abraham (8:4859)\n\nTranslators may wish to include a note at [verse 1](../08/01.md) to explain to the reader why they have chosen to translate or to not translate [verses 8:111](../08/01.md). [Verses 7:538:11](../07/53.md) are not in the best and oldest ancient manuscripts. Those ancient texts which do have these verses also have many differences between them, which are additional evidence that these verses were not originally in the Gospel of John. If the translators have chosen to translate these verses, then they will want to either put them in a footnote outside of the main text or mark them in some way, such as square brackets ([ ]), to indicate that the passage may not have originally been in Johns Gospel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nGenerally in Johns Gospel, light represents what is true and good and darkness represents what is false and evil. Similar to the discussion of light in [1:49](../01/04.md), in [8:12](../08/12.md) Jesus applies the light metaphor to himself in order to show that he is the embodiment of Gods truth and goodness. Jesus calls himself the Light of the World because he is the one who enables people to know Gods truth and goodness. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/light]])\n\n### I AM\n\nJohn records Jesus saying these words as an independent phrase three times in this chapter ([8:24](../08/24.md), [28](../08/28.md), [58](../08/58.md)). They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew expression “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses in [Exodus 3:14](../exo/03/14.md). For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([8:28](../08/28.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
8:1 mkz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThe best early texts do not have [7:538:11](../07/53.md). The ULT has set them apart in square brackets ([ ]) to show that John probably did not include them in his original text. See the discussion of this textual issue in the General Notes to this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
8:1 mkz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants 0 # General Information:\n\nThe best early texts do not have [7:538:11](../07/53.md). The ULT has set them apart in square brackets ([ ]) to show that John probably did not include them in his original text. See the discussion of this textual issue in the General Notes to this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
8:12 m4ma rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent 0 In this verse Jesus begins speaking to a crowd near the treasury in the temple some time after the events of [John 7:152](../07/01.md). John does not mark the beginning of this new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:12 pvpr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations πάλιν & αὐτοῖς ἐλάλησεν & λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “spoke to the people again, and he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
8:12 k5ib rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου & ἀλλ’ ἕξει τὸ φῶς τῆς ζωῆς 1 Here Jesus uses **light** to refer to Gods truth and goodness that are revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of Gods truth and goodness. See the discussion of **light** and **darkness** in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am the one who reveals Gods truth and goodness, that is like a light, to the world … but will have that truth and goodness of life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -1126,7 +1126,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
8:26 ivk5 ὁ πέμψας με ἀληθής ἐστιν 1 Here, **true** means to be truthful or to speak only the truth. If this use of **true** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who sent me is truthful” or “the one who sent me tells the truth”
8:26 xj8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ’ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα 1 Jesus says that **the one who sent** him **is true** in order to imply that **these things** he **heard** and spoke are **true**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the true things that I heard from him, these true things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:26 lsc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 Here, John records Jesus using **the world** to refer to the people who live in **the world**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things I say to everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:27 i7gq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John gives information about the Jewish leaders to explain their reaction to Jesus teaching. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
8:27 i7gq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John gives information about the Jewish leaders to explain their reaction to Jesus teaching. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
8:27 hh1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
8:28 x6ca rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅταν ὑψώσητε 1 Here, John records Jesus referring to when he would be **lifted up** on the cross to be killed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “When you have lifted me up on a cross to kill me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:28 qsch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὅταν ὑψώσητε τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this clause in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
9:11 b5zf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit νίψαι & καὶ νιψάμενος 1 See how you translated **wash** in [verse 7](../09/07.md). Alternate translation: “wash your eyes … and having washed my eyes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:11 ajxb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀνέβλεψα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sight**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I could see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9:13 cu14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture ἄγουσιν 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
9:14 dl48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about when Jesus healed the man. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
9:14 dl48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about when Jesus healed the man. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
9:14 ef0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν πηλὸν ἐποίησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς, καὶ ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 The negative reaction of the Pharisees described in the following verses is based on their belief that, according to their religious law, Jesus actions were considered to be work. Therefore, they believed that he was disobeying Gods command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]]). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus made the mud and opened his eyes. These were two deeds the Pharisees considered to be work.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:14 qxy9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 Here, **opened** **eyes** describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused him to see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:15 d6xd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν οὖν ἠρώτων αὐτὸν καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 1 Here, **again** means that this is the second time people questioned the blind man whom Jesus had healed. It does not mean that this is the second time **the Pharisees** questioned him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then, in addition to his neighbors questioning him, the Pharisees also began asking him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1276,7 +1276,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
9:19 npf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τυφλὸς ἐγεννήθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was blind when you bore him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:20 pg6a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τυφλὸς ἐγεννήθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was blind when his mother bore him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:21 ahky rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡλικίαν ἔχει 1 The phrase **full maturity** describes a person who is an adult and is legally responsible for himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “is an adult” or “is a full-grown man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:22 yq73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about the mans parents being afraid of the Jewish leaders. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
9:22 yq73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about the mans parents being afraid of the Jewish leaders. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
9:22 k2iw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τοὺς Ἰουδαίους & οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders, which in this chapter may have been a group of leaders among the Pharisees. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
9:22 yjv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποσυνάγωγος γένηται 1 Here John uses **put out of the synagogue** to refer to no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attend services at the synagogue. When people were **put out of the synagogue**, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he would not be allowed to enter the synagogue” or “he would no longer belong to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:23 go77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡλικίαν ἔχει 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 21](../09/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1306,7 +1306,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
9:34 wo1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Your mother bore you completely in sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:34 mcm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος 1 The Jewish leaders mention the formerly blind man being **born in sins** to imply that the **sins** of his parents had caused his blindness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You were born blind completely because of your parents sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:34 kl2x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω 1 Here John uses **threw him out** to refer to him no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attend services at the synagogue. When people were thrown out of the synagogue, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he was forbidden to enter the synagogue” or “he was forbidden to belong to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:35 z6r9 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nJesus finds the man whom he healed in ([verses 17](../09/01.md)) and begins to speak to him and the crowd.
9:35 z6r9 0 # General Information:\n\nJesus finds the man whom he healed in ([verses 17](../09/01.md)) and begins to speak to him and the crowd.
9:35 amfh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “they had forbidden him from entering the synagogue” or “they had forbidden him from belonging to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:35 mxkw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὑρὼν αὐτὸν 1 Here, **found** implies that **Jesus** had first searched for the man. It does not mean that Jesus unintentionally or accidentally met the man at another time. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having looked for him and found him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:35 tw58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Here Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man”. However, the formerly blind man did not realize that Jesus was speaking of himself, and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to him until verse [37](../09/37.md). Therefore, you do not need to explain that Jesus is speaking about himself here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
@ -1325,7 +1325,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
9:41 jmq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν, ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει 1 See how you translated **see** in [verse 39](../09/39.md). Alternate translation: “you say, We know Gods truth. Your sin remains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:41 ch0y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν, ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “you say that you see, so your sin remains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
10:intro e8mb 0 # John 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus tells the Parable of the Sheep Pen (10:16)\n2. Jesus says he is the gate of the sheep pen (10:710)\n3. Jesus says he is the Good Shepherd (10:1118)\n4. The Jewish leaders disagree about who Jesus is (10:1921)\n5. Jesus says he is God at the Festival of Dedication (10:2242)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Blasphemy\n\nBlasphemy is when a person claims that he is God or claims that God has told him to speak when God has not told him to speak. The law of Moses commanded the Israelites to kill blasphemers by throwing stones at them until they died. When Jesus said, “I and the Father are one,” the Jews thought he was blaspheming, so they picked up stones to kill him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Parables\n\nParables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. People who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message ([10:16](../10/01.md)).\n\n### Sheep\n\nJesus spoke metaphorically of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, do not think well, often walk away from those who care for them, and cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. Gods people are similar to sheep in that they also are weak and do foolish things like rebelling against God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/sheep]])\n\n### Sheep pen\n\nA sheep pen was a space with a stone wall around it in which shepherds would keep their sheep for periods of time, such as over night. There were large sheep pens in which multiple flocks were kept, and also smaller sheep pens for a single flock. Once they were inside the sheep pen, the sheep could not run away, and animals and thieves could not easily get inside to kill or steal them. In [10:15](../10/01.md), Jesus uses the sheep pen as a metaphor for the people of Israel. Out of the “sheep pen” of the Jewish people, Jesus calls his first “sheep.”\n\n### Laying down and taking up life\n\nJesus speaks of his life as if it were a physical object that he could: (1) lay down on the ground, which is a metaphor for dying, or (2) pick up again, which is a metaphor for becoming alive again.
10:1 gzd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 15](../10/01.md), Jesus speaks a parable, which he then uses for teaching purposes in [verses 718](../10/07.md). Here, the “shepherd” is a metaphor for Jesus and “sheep” is a metaphor for people. “His own sheep” are the people who follow Jesus, and the **thief**, **robber**, and “strangers” are the Jewish leaders, including the Pharisees, who try to deceive the people. Since Jesus does not explain the meaning of this parable here, you should not explain the metaphors within the parable itself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
10:1 gzd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 15](../10/01.md), Jesus speaks a parable, which he then uses for teaching purposes in [verses 718](../10/07.md). Here, the “shepherd” is a metaphor for Jesus and “sheep” is a metaphor for people. “His own sheep” are the people who follow Jesus, and the **thief**, **robber**, and “strangers” are the Jewish leaders, including the Pharisees, who try to deceive the people. Since Jesus does not explain the meaning of this parable here, you should not explain the metaphors within the parable itself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
10:1 ab9x Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIn [verses 121](../10/01.md), Jesus continues to speak to the Pharisees whom he was speaking with at the end of the last chapter. This section continues the story which began in [9:35](../09/35.md).
10:1 i3tj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
10:1 xq1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown αὐλὴν τῶν προβάτων 1 A **sheep pen** is an enclosed or fenced area where a shepherd keeps his sheep. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. If your readers would not be familiar with this way of protecting livestock, you could use a general expression for a roofless space surrounded by walls or a fence. Alternate translation: “walled area for protecting the sheep” or “place where sheep are kept” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@ -1402,7 +1402,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
10:21 zrwb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ταῦτα τὰ ῥήματα οὐκ ἔστιν δαιμονιζομένου 1 Here, **words** refers to what a **demon-possessed man** would say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “These things are not what a demon-possessed man would say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:21 mj2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ δαιμόνιον δύναται τυφλῶν ὀφθαλμοὺς ἀνοῖξαι? 1 The people are using the form of a question to emphasize that they do not believe that a **demon** could heal a **blind** person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly a demon cannot cause a blind man to see!” or “Certainly a demon cannot give sight to blind people!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10:21 dcau rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τυφλῶν ὀφθαλμοὺς ἀνοῖξαι 1 Here, **open the eyes** describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, **the eyes**. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to cause the blind to see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:22 f9cm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nSome Jews begin to question Jesus during **the Festival of Dedication**. This verse gives background information about the time when the events of [verses 2439](../10/24.md) took place. The next verse gives background information about the place where those events too place. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
10:22 f9cm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nSome Jews begin to question Jesus during **the Festival of Dedication**. This verse gives background information about the time when the events of [verses 2439](../10/24.md) took place. The next verse gives background information about the place where those events too place. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
10:22 w25f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὰ ἐνκαίνια 1 The **Festival of Dedication** is an eight-day holiday that Jews celebrate in the **winter** to remember when they dedicated the Jewish temple to God after it had been defiled by the Syrians. If your readers would not be familiar with this holiday, you could use a general expression to explain it. Alternate translation: “the Jewish temple dedication festival” or “the Jewish festival for remembering the dedication of their temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
10:23 v6wn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche περιεπάτει ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 **Jesus was walking** in the courtyard of **the temple**. See how you translated** temple** in [8:14](../08/14.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus was walking in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
10:23 henb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῇ στοᾷ τοῦ Σολομῶνος 1 Here, the possessive form describes **the porch** that was associated with King **Solomon** in some way. It may have been the only remaining part of the temple built during the time of **Solomon**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the porch associated with Solomon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@ -1464,7 +1464,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
10:41 yfin σημεῖον 1 See how you translated **sign** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracle”
10:41 gd31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τούτου 1 Here, **this one** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this man, Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
11:intro tks5 0 # John 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus returns to Judea (11:116)\n2. Jesus seventh sign: Jesus makes Lazarus become alive again (11:1746)\n3. The Jewish leaders plan to kill Jesus (11:4757)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Ancient Jewish burial customs\n\nAccording to the burial customs of that time, a dead persons family would wrap the dead body with many strips of linen cloth and place it on a table inside a tomb. The tomb was either a cave or a room cut out of the side a large rock. According to Jewish tradition, the body was left to decompose in the tomb for one year. Then the family would place the bones in a stone box. If your readers would be unfamiliar with these burial customs, then you may need to provide explanations in your translation or in a note for [verses 3844](../11/38.md).\n\n### Passover\n\nAfter Jesus made Lazarus become alive again, the Jewish leaders were determined to kill Jesus, so he started traveling secretly from place to place. The Pharisees knew that he would come to Jerusalem for the Passover festival because God had commanded all Jewish men to celebrate the Passover in Jerusalem. Thus they planned to catch him and kill him during Passover ([11:5557](../11/55.md)). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “One man dies for the people”\n\nIn the law of Moses, God commanded the priests to kill animals so that God would forgive the peoples sins. In this chapter, the high priest Caiaphas says, “It is better for you that one man dies for the people than that the whole nation perishes” ([11:50](../11/50.md)). He said this because he loved his “place” and “nation” ([11:48](../11/48.md)) more than he loved the God who had made Lazarus become alive again. He wanted Jesus to die so that the Romans would not destroy the temple and Jerusalem. However, God wanted Jesus to die so that he could forgive all of his peoples sins.\n\n### “The Jews”\n\nThis term is used in three different ways in this chapter. Unlike in other parts of Johns Gospel, it is used here primarily to refer to the Jewish people who were living in Judea, especially Judean friends and relatives of Lazarus. Some of these Judeans believed in Jesus and others opposed him ([11:3637](../11/36.md)). The term is also used specifically at least once in this chapter to refer to the Jewish leaders who opposed Jesus and were trying to kill him ([11:8](../11/08.md) and possibly [11:54](../11/54.md)). Finally, the term is used in [11:55](../11/55.md) to refer to the Jewish people in general. The translator may wish to use the terms “Judeans,” “Jewish authorities,” and “Jewish people” to clarify these distinctions.\n\n### Hypothetical situation\n\nWhen Martha and Mary said, “If you had been here, my brother would not have died,” they were speaking of a situation that could have happened but did not happen ([11:21](../11/21.md), [32](../11/32.md)). Jesus had not come, and their brother did die.
11:1 fsf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 12](../11/01.md) provide background information about **Lazarus** and his sisters. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
11:1 fsf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 12](../11/01.md) provide background information about **Lazarus** and his sisters. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
11:1 s5im rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἦν δέ τις ἀσθενῶν Λάζαρος ἀπὸ Βηθανίας 1 This verse introduces **Lazarus** as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “There was a man named Lazarus, who was from Bethany and was sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
11:1 p19k rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship Μάρθας τῆς ἀδελφῆς αὐτῆς 1 Because those who wrote scripture usually listed the names of siblings in order from oldest to youngest, the list in [verse 5](../11/05.md) suggests that **Martha** was the oldest and **Lazarus** was the youngest of the three siblings. If your language uses different words for **sister** depending on birth order, use the word for an older **sister** here. Alternate translation: “her older sister Martha” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
11:2 c6r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events ἦν δὲ Μαρία ἡ ἀλείψασα τὸν Κύριον μύρῳ, καὶ ἐκμάξασα τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ ταῖς θριξὶν αὐτῆς 1 Here, John refers to an event that would happen at a time following the events recorded in this chapter ([12:18](../12/01.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could translate this as a future event. Alternate translation: “Now it was Mary who would later anoint the Lord with myrrh and wipe his feet with her hair” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
@ -1559,7 +1559,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
11:44 x4cb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δεδεμένος τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας κειρίαις, καὶ ἡ ὄψις αὐτοῦ σουδαρίῳ περιεδέδετο 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone having bound his feet and hands with cloths, and someone having bound his face with a cloth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:44 h203 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown δεδεμένος τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας κειρίαις, καὶ ἡ ὄψις αὐτοῦ σουδαρίῳ περιεδέδετο 1 Wrapping a dead body in strips of **cloth** was the burial custom in this culture. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “his feet and hands having been bound with burial cloths, and his face having been wrapped with a burial cloth” or “his feet, hands, and face having been wrapped in clothes for burial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
11:44 n5yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
11:45 rlf4 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 4554] explain what happened after Jesus raised Lazarus from the dead.
11:45 rlf4 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 4554] explain what happened after Jesus raised Lazarus from the dead.
11:45 ksi3 τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 19](../11/19.md).
11:47 yl3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Συνέδριον 1 The **Sanhedrin** is the name of the highest ruling council of the Jews. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, their ruling council” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:47 y70t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Συνέδριον 1 **Sanhedrin** is the name of a governing body. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@ -1574,7 +1574,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
11:49 lj6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε οὐδέν 1 Here, **Caiaphas** uses an exaggeration in order to insult his hearers. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows contempt. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what is happening” or “You speak as though you know nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
11:50 fvry rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἔθνος ἀπόληται 1 Caiaphas implies that the Roman army would kill all of the people of the Jewish **nation** if Jesus is allowed to live and cause a rebellion. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the Romans would not kill all the people of our nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:50 zh9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἔθνος ἀπόληται 1 Here, **nation** refers to all of the Jewish people. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and all the people of our nation would not perish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
11:51 qww5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 5152](../11/51.md) John interrupts the story to explain that Caiaphas was prophesying even though he did not realize it at the time. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
11:51 qww5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 5152](../11/51.md) John interrupts the story to explain that Caiaphas was prophesying even though he did not realize it at the time. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
11:51 kw41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 Here, **from himself** could mean: (1) Caiaphas was speaking something he had thought of himself. Alternate translation: “on his own initiative” (2) Caiaphas was speaking from his own authority, which is how the phrase is used in [5:19](../05/19.md). Alternate translation: “on his own authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:51 mw4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀλλὰ ἀρχιερεὺς ὢν τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ἐκείνου 1 This clause indicates the reason why Caiaphas **prophesied** a true prophecy from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he was high priest that year” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
11:51 eh17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀποθνῄσκειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἔθνους 1 See how you translated **nation** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@ -1590,7 +1590,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
11:54 h5jk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κἀκεῖ ἔμεινεν μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν 1 Jesus and his disciples **stayed** in Ephraim for a short period of time. If your language requires a length of time for **stayed**, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “There he stayed with the disciples for a time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:55 qd5y ἀνέβησαν & εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 The phrase **went up** is used here because Jerusalem is at a higher elevation than the surrounding areas. See how you translated **went up** in [7:10](../07/10.md).
11:55 rsgm τῆς χώρας 1 Here, **country** could refer to: (1) an area of land. Alternate translation: “the area” or “the district” (2) the rural area outside cities where fewer people live. Alternate translation: “the countryside” or “the rural area”
11:56 a5kt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThe event in [verse 57](../11/57.md) occurs before the event in this verse. If this order might confuse your readers, you can combine these verses and put the text of [verse 57](../11/57.md) before the text of this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
11:56 a5kt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events 0 # General Information:\n\nThe event in [verse 57](../11/57.md) occurs before the event in this verse. If this order might confuse your readers, you can combine these verses and put the text of [verse 57](../11/57.md) before the text of this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
11:56 kc75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐζήτουν & τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 Here, **they** refers to the Jewish people who had traveled to Jerusalem before the Passover celebration, as described in the previous verse. If this use of **they** might be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people who came to Jerusalem before the Passover celebration were looking for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
11:56 y3xz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 The people were standing in the courtyard of **the temple**. See how you translated **temple** in [verse 14](../08/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
11:56 i7en rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τί δοκεῖ ὑμῖν 1 This is an idiom used to ask for someones opinion. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “What is your opinion” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -1632,7 +1632,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
12:11 kjk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ αὐτὸν 1 This phrase implies that the fact that Lazarus was alive after he had been dead caused many **Jews** to believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because Lazarus was alive after having died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:11 n6gl τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 9](../12/09.md).
12:11 ex1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπῆγον 1 Here, John uses **went away** to refer to the fact that **many of the Jews** stopped believing the teachings of the Jewish religious authorities and starting trusting Jesus instead. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “stopped listening to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:12 f1im General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nJesus enters Jerusalem and the people honor him as a king of Israel.
12:12 f1im 0 # General Information:\n\nJesus enters Jerusalem and the people honor him as a king of Israel.
12:12 w1c2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent τῇ ἐπαύριον 1 John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “On the day after that happened,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
12:12 sy8h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος πολὺς 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
12:12 t3jl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν ἑορτήν 1 Here, **festival** refers to the Jewish Passover festival. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1705,7 +1705,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
12:32 ms6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐὰν ὑψωθῶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς 1 Here, **lifted up from the earth** could refer to: (1) Jesus crucifixion only, in which case **earth** would refer to the ground. Alternate translation: “if I am lifted up from the ground on a cross” (2) Jesus crucifixion and return to heaven, in which case **earth** refers to both the ground and the planet. See the discussion about double meaning in the Part 3 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “if I am lifted up from the earth on a cross and then up to heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:32 n7i6 πάντας ἑλκύσω πρὸς ἐμαυτόν 1 See how you translated “draws” in [6:44](../06/44.md). Alternate translation: “will pull everyone to myself”
12:32 f45r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντας ἑλκύσω πρὸς ἐμαυτόν 1 Here, **everyone** is an exaggeration that Jesus uses to refer to all people groups, both Jews and non-Jews. The context of non-Jewish people coming to see Jesus in [verse 20](../12/20.md) suggests this meaning. This clause does not mean that every individual person will believe in Jesus. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “will draw people from both Jews and non-Jews” or “will draw people, all people, Jews and non-Jews alike” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
12:33 b1zu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John explains the meaning of what Jesus said in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
12:33 b1zu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John explains the meaning of what Jesus said in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
12:34 swpp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
12:34 su0r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τοῦ νόμου 1 The crowd is using the name of the first part of the Hebrew Scriptures, the law, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. See how you translated this use of **the law** in [10:34](../10/34.md). Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
12:34 mx1k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δεῖ ὑψωθῆναι τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Here, the phrase **lifted up** means “crucified.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for the Son of Man to be crucified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1719,7 +1719,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
12:35 h0q9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ περιπατῶν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ 1 Jesus uses this phrase to refer to a person who lives a sinful life and behaves sinfully. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who lives sinfully” or “the one who does not behave righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:36 j1rs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς & εἰς τὸ φῶς 1 Both occurrences of **the light** here refer to Jesus. See how you translated **light** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:36 xu4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom υἱοὶ φωτὸς 1 Here, **sons of light** is an idiom that refers to people who live according to Gods truth and goodness, which Jesus has revealed to them. Here, **sons** does not refer specifically to male children and **light** does not refer to Jesus. If this expression would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “people who share in Gods truth and goodness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12:37 s1wh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 3743](../12/37.md) John interrupts the main storyline in order to explain how the Jewish people had fulfilled prophecies that had been spoken by the prophet Isaiah. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information for these verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
12:37 s1wh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 3743](../12/37.md) John interrupts the main storyline in order to explain how the Jewish people had fulfilled prophecies that had been spoken by the prophet Isaiah. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information for these verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
12:37 g1z3 σημεῖα 1 See how you translated **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
12:38 k15e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα ὁ λόγος Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πληρωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to fulfill the word of Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:38 n4m7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου 1 Here, **word** refers to the specific prophecy written down by Isaiah that is quoted in the second half of this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this prophecy of Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -1767,7 +1767,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
12:50 tar2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἶδα, ὅτι ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **his command** refers to the teachings that God commanded Jesus to speak, as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know that what he commanded me to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:50 q9cr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιός ἐστιν 1 This phrase means that what God commanded Jesus to say gives **eternal life** to those who believe it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “his command gives eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:intro zk68 0 # John 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. The Passover meal begins: Jesus washes his disciples feet (13:120)\n2. Jesus predicts that Judas will betray him (13:2130)\n3. Jesus commands his disciples to love each other (13:3135)\n4. Jesus predicts that Peter will deny him (13:3638)\n\nThe events of this chapter are commonly referred to as the “Last Supper.” In many ways this Passover meal parallels the sacrifice of Jesus as the lamb of God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lordssupper]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The washing of feet\n\nPeople in the Ancient Near East thought that feet were very dirty. Only servants would wash peoples feet. The disciples did not want Jesus to wash their feet, because they considered him to be their master and themselves to be his servants, and it was a servants job to wash the feet of master and guests. However, Jesus wanted to show them that his disciples need to humbly serve and love each other. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])\n\n### I AM\n\nJohn records Jesus saying these words as an independent phrase one time in this chapter ([13:19](../13/19.md)). They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew expression “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses in [Exodus 3:14](../../exo/03/14.md). For these reasons many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “The disciple whom Jesus loved”\n\nThe Apostle John first referred to himself as the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in this chapter ([13:23](../13/23.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. If this is the case, then you will need to add a first person pronoun to these references and the other references to John in ([13:2325](../13/23.md)). If your language can retain the third person references, then you may still want to make these references to John explicit by adding “John” next to them. See the discussion of this in Part 1 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/johntheapostle]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([13:31](../13/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
13:1 wk2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIt is not yet **Passover**, and **Jesus** is with his disciples for the evening meal. [Verses 14](../13/01.md) explain the setting of the story and give background information about Jesus and Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
13:1 wk2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIt is not yet **Passover**, and **Jesus** is with his disciples for the evening meal. [Verses 14](../13/01.md) explain the setting of the story and give background information about Jesus and Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
13:1 z4q9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἦλθεν αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα 1 Here, the word **hour** is used to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. See how you translated this word in [7:30](../07/30.md). Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:1 w7w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
13:1 a1w4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς ἰδίους τοὺς ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 This phrase refers to Jesus disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his own disciples who were with him in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -2212,7 +2212,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
17:26 gk2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ ἀγάπη ἣν ἠγάπησάς με, ἐν αὐτοῖς ᾖ 1 Here Jesus speaks of Gods **love** as if it were an object that could be inside a person. If this use of **love** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they may love others in the same way that you have loved me” or “the love with which you have loved me may be experienced by them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:26 ilzj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 Here, Jesus uses the word **in** to express the close personal relationship between himself and those who believe in him. See how you translated a similar phrase in [10:38](../10/38.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
18:intro ltl2 0 # John 18 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Soldiers and guards arrest Jesus (18:111)\n2. The priests question Jesus, and Peter denies Jesus (18:1227)\n3. Pilate questions Jesus (18:2840)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “It is not lawful for us to put any man to death”\n\nThe Roman government did not allow the Jews to kill criminals, so the Jews needed to ask Pilate, the governor, to kill him ([18:31](../18/31.md)).\n\n### King of the Jews\n\nWhen Pilate asked if Jesus were the King of the Jews ([18:33](../18/33.md)), he was asking if Jesus were claiming to be a political leader like King Herod, whom the Romans allowed to rule Judea. When he asked the crowd if he should release the King of the Jews ([18:39](../18/39.md)), he is mocking the Jews, because the Romans and Jews hated each other. He was also mocking Jesus, because he did not think that Jesus was a king at all. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
18:1 sq3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 12](../18/01.md) give background information for the events that follow. Verse 1 says where the events took place. Verse 2 gives background information about Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
18:1 sq3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 12](../18/01.md) give background information for the events that follow. Verse 1 says where the events took place. Verse 2 gives background information about Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
18:1 cxz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ταῦτα εἰπὼν, Ἰησοῦς 1 John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event that happened soon after the events that the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Soon after Jesus spoke these words, he” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
18:1 pxtm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ χειμάρρου τοῦ Κεδρὼν 1 John is using **of** to describe a **brook** that is called **Kidron**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Kidron Brook” or “the brook that people called Kidron” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
18:1 z9bw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τοῦ χειμάρρου τοῦ Κεδρὼν 1 **Kidron** is a valley in Jerusalem that is between the Temple Mount and the Mount of Olives. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@ -2274,7 +2274,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
18:26 pj7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ κήπῳ 1 See how you translated **garden** in [verse 1](../18/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:27 msy6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν οὖν ἠρνήσατο Πέτρος 1 Here, **it** refers to **Peter** knowing and being with Jesus. If this use of **it** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter then denied again that he knew Jesus or had been with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:27 jww8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀλέκτωρ 1 See how you translated **rooster** in [13:38](../13/38.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
18:28 a6e7 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nHere John changes topics from describing what Peter was doing to describing what was happening to Jesus. In the next section, Jesus accusers bring him to Caiaphas to be questioned by him.
18:28 a6e7 0 # General Information:\n\nHere John changes topics from describing what Peter was doing to describing what was happening to Jesus. In the next section, Jesus accusers bring him to Caiaphas to be questioned by him.
18:28 r4fk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἄγουσιν 1 Here, **they** refers to the Jewish leaders and temple guards who were accusing Jesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities and their guards led” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
18:28 ija7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄγουσιν οὖν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ Καϊάφα 1 Here John implies that they are leading Jesus away from Caiaphas house. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then they led Jesus from Caiaphas house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:28 fyx3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον 1 The **governors palace** refers to the headquarters of the Roman governor. The next verse indicates that the Roman governors name was Pilate. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the house of the Roman governor, Pilate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -2288,7 +2288,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
18:30 gj5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος κακὸν ποιῶν, οὐκ ἄν σοι παρεδώκαμεν αὐτόν 1 If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “This man is an evildoer, so we have brought him to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
18:31 ln9s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche εἶπον αὐτῷ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
18:31 ph54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡμῖν οὐκ ἔξεστιν ἀποκτεῖναι οὐδένα 1 According to Roman law, the Jews could not **put anyone to death**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “According to Roman law, it is not lawful for us to put anyone to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:32 s3l4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about Jesus predicting how he would die. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
18:32 s3l4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn this verse John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about Jesus predicting how he would die. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
18:32 ta7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα ὁ λόγος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ πληρωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This happened in order to fulfill the word of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
18:32 tu3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σημαίνων ποίῳ θανάτῳ ἤμελλεν ἀποθνῄσκειν 1 Here, **kind of death** refers to the manner in which Jesus would die. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to indicate in what manner he was about to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:33 tr28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφώνησεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 Here, **summoned** implies that **Pilate** ordered some of his soldiers to bring Jesus to him inside his headquarters. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Jesus inside to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -2432,7 +2432,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
19:35 p17b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 This verse is a break from the main storyline in which John provides some background information about himself. John is telling readers that they can trust what he has written because he saw these events happen. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
19:35 bs5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ ἑωρακὼς & αὐτοῦ & ἐκεῖνος οἶδεν ὅτι ἀληθῆ λέγει 1 These phrases refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. He is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the one who saw this … my … I know that I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
19:35 c9q7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς πιστεύητε 1 John is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “so that you would also believe that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
19:36 wid6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 3637](../19/36.md) are another break from the main storyline in which John tells us that the two events in [verses 3334](../19/33.md) made some prophecies in scripture come true. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
19:36 wid6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 3637](../19/36.md) are another break from the main storyline in which John tells us that the two events in [verses 3334](../19/33.md) made some prophecies in scripture come true. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
19:36 uyvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations ἐγένετο & ταῦτα, ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ 1 Here John uses **that the scripture would be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “these things happened in order that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
19:36 l8zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγένετο & ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to the two events described in [verses 3334](../19/33.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers did not break Jesus legs but pierced his side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19:36 qwl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to fulfill the words that someone wrote in scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -2559,7 +2559,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
20:29 q81m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πεπίστευκας & πιστεύσαντες 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you have believed that I have become alive again … having believed that I have become alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
20:29 sax7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μακάριοι οἱ μὴ ἰδόντες 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God blesses those not having seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
20:29 q9fb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μὴ ἰδόντες 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “not having seen me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
20:30 yd1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 3031](../20/30.md) John comments about the story he has written in chapters 1 through 20. He also states his reason for writing this book. He does this in order to indicate that the story is almost finished. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
20:30 yd1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 3031](../20/30.md) John comments about the story he has written in chapters 1 through 20. He also states his reason for writing this book. He does this in order to indicate that the story is almost finished. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
20:30 azxu σημεῖα 1 See how you translated the term **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
20:30 xz6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τούτῳ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since John wrote this Gospel, you should use the first person pronoun “I” to indicate who did the action. Alternate translation: “which I have not written in this book” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
20:31 zlc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** could mean: (1) the miraculous signs that John wrote about in his Gospel and mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these signs” (2) everything that John wrote about in his Gospel. Alternate translation: “everything in this book” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -2573,7 +2573,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
21:intro e1bg 0 # John 21 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus eats breakfast with his disciples (21:114)\n2. Jesus restores Peter as his disciple (21:1519)\n3. Jesus and Peter speak about John (21:2023)\n4. John concludes his Gospel (21:2425)\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The metaphor of sheep\n\nBefore Jesus died, he spoke of himself taking care of his people as if he were a good shepherd taking care of sheep ([10:11](../10/11.md)). After he became alive again, Jesus commanded Peter to take care of other believers in the same way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “The disciple whom Jesus loved”\n\nThe apostle John referred to himself as the disciple “whom Jesus loved” twice in this chapter ([21:7](../21/07.md), [20](../21/20.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. If this is the case, then you will need to use a first person pronoun for these references and the other references to John throughout this chapter. You would also need to use first person plural pronouns in this chapter for all references to the disciples as a group, since John was one of them. If your language can retain the third person references, then you may want to make these references to John explicit by adding “John” next to them. See the discussion of this in Part 1 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/johntheapostle]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n### Different words for “love”\n\nIn [verses 1517](../21/15.md), Jesus and Peter speak to each other using two different words in the original language that could both be translated as “love.” These words are often used interchangeably. However, when they are used together, as in [verses 1517](../21/15.md), they can have slightly different meanings. One word can refer to a type of love that is based on affection and friendship, but the other word can refer to a type of love that is based on sincere devotion and high esteem for the person being loved. Although the UST translates both of these words as “love,” the notes will provide more specific alternatives.
21:1 x44v rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 # General Information:\n\nThis phrase introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
21:1 yj6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names θαλάσσης τῆς Τιβεριάδος 1 This **Sea** was also called “the Sea of Galilee.” See how you translated the similar name in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
21:2 et5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 23](../21/02.md) provide background information on what happens in the story before Jesus appears to his disciples at the Sea of Tiberias. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
21:2 et5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 23](../21/02.md) provide background information on what happens in the story before Jesus appears to his disciples at the Sea of Tiberias. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
21:2 b421 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Θωμᾶς ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος 1 See how you translated this phrase in [11:16](../11/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:2 m4gx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κανὰ τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 See how you translated **Cana of Galilee** in [2:1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
21:2 xyiv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου 1 This phrase refers to the disciples John and James, whom Jesus called “sons of thunder” in [Mark 3:17](../../mrk/03/17.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “James and I, the sons of Zebedee” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -2646,7 +2646,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
21:23 cs14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **him** here refers to Peter. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:23 elmi rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει & αὐτὸν 1 The pronouns **he** and **him** here refer to John. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:23 qxqr ἐὰν αὐτὸν θέλω μένειν ἕως ἔρχομαι, τί πρὸς σέ 1 See how you translated this sentence in the previous verse.
21:24 s5bp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 2425](../21/24.md) John indicates the end of his Gospel by giving a closing comment about himself and what he has written in this book. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
21:24 s5bp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 2425](../21/24.md) John indicates the end of his Gospel by giving a closing comment about himself and what he has written in this book. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
21:24 d6t5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ μαθητὴς ὁ μαρτυρῶν περὶ τούτων, καὶ ὁ γράψας ταῦτα, καὶ οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀληθὴς αὐτοῦ ἡ μαρτυρία ἐστίν 1 In this verse John is speaking about himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I am the disciple who testifies about these things and who wrote these things, and we know that my testimony is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
21:24 f7ww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τούτων & ταῦτα 1 In this verse, **these things** refers to everything that John has written in this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “everything in this book … all these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:24 h5i9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν 1 Here the pronoun **we** is exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

Can't render this file because it is too large.

View File

@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ front:intro hk4p 0 # Introduction to Jonah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
1:15 l9cf וַ⁠יַּעֲמֹ֥ד הַ⁠יָּ֖ם מִ⁠זַּעְפּֽ⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “the sea stopped moving violently”
1:15 ab89 וַ⁠יַּעֲמֹ֥ד הַ⁠יָּ֖ם מִ⁠זַּעְפּֽ⁠וֹ 1 This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: “the sea became calm”
1:16 r3gs וַ⁠יִּֽירְא֧וּ הָ⁠אֲנָשִׁ֛ים יִרְאָ֥ה גְדוֹלָ֖ה אֶת־יְהוָ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “then the men became greatly awed at Yahwehs power” or “then the men worshiped Yahweh with great awe”
1:17 q87y General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nSome versions number this verse as the first verse of chapter 2. You may want to number the verses according to the main version that your language group uses.
1:17 q87y 0 # General Information:\n\nSome versions number this verse as the first verse of chapter 2. You may want to number the verses according to the main version that your language group uses.
1:17 jdr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ⁠יְמַ֤ן יְהוָה֙ דָּ֣ג גָּד֔וֹל לִ⁠בְלֹ֖עַ אֶת־יוֹנָ֑ה 1 This clause introduces the next part of the story, where Yahweh saves Jonah from the sea, and Jonah prays. In this context, the word **Now** is used in English to introduce a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1:17 cjb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה יָמִ֖ים וּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה לֵילֽוֹת 1 Perhaps this expression is an idiom in Hebrew meaning “a couple of days” or “a few days” or something similar, but this is uncertain. Alternate translation: “three days and nights” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:intro ae4k 0 # Jonah 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter begins with a prayer by Jonah, and many translators have chosen to set it apart by setting its lines farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. Translators can follow this practice, but they are not obligated to.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Sea\n\nThis chapter contains many terms from the sea.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Poetry\n\nPrayers in Scripture often contain a poetic form. Poetry frequently uses metaphors to communicate something with a special meaning. For example, since Jonah was in a fish in the sea, being so trapped is compared to a prison. Jonah is overwhelmed by the depth of the sea and expresses this by speaking about being at the “base of the mountains” and in the “belly of Sheol.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Repentance\n\nScholars are divided over whether Jonahs repentance was genuine or whether he was trying to save his life. In light of his attitude in chapter 4, it is uncertain whether he was genuinely repentant. If possible, it is best for translators to avoid taking a definitive stance on whether Jonahs repentance was genuine. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
64 1:15 l9cf וַ⁠יַּעֲמֹ֥ד הַ⁠יָּ֖ם מִ⁠זַּעְפּֽ⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “the sea stopped moving violently”
65 1:15 ab89 וַ⁠יַּעֲמֹ֥ד הַ⁠יָּ֖ם מִ⁠זַּעְפּֽ⁠וֹ 1 This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: “the sea became calm”
66 1:16 r3gs וַ⁠יִּֽירְא֧וּ הָ⁠אֲנָשִׁ֛ים יִרְאָ֥ה גְדוֹלָ֖ה אֶת־יְהוָ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “then the men became greatly awed at Yahweh’s power” or “then the men worshiped Yahweh with great awe”
67 1:17 q87y General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nSome versions number this verse as the first verse of chapter 2. You may want to number the verses according to the main version that your language group uses.
68 1:17 jdr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ⁠יְמַ֤ן יְהוָה֙ דָּ֣ג גָּד֔וֹל לִ⁠בְלֹ֖עַ אֶת־יוֹנָ֑ה 1 This clause introduces the next part of the story, where Yahweh saves Jonah from the sea, and Jonah prays. In this context, the word **Now** is used in English to introduce a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
69 1:17 cjb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה יָמִ֖ים וּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה לֵילֽוֹת 1 Perhaps this expression is an idiom in Hebrew meaning “a couple of days” or “a few days” or something similar, but this is uncertain. Alternate translation: “three days and nights” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
70 2:intro ae4k 0 # Jonah 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter begins with a prayer by Jonah, and many translators have chosen to set it apart by setting its lines farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. Translators can follow this practice, but they are not obligated to.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Sea\n\nThis chapter contains many terms from the sea.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Poetry\n\nPrayers in Scripture often contain a poetic form. Poetry frequently uses metaphors to communicate something with a special meaning. For example, since Jonah was in a fish in the sea, being so trapped is compared to a prison. Jonah is overwhelmed by the depth of the sea and expresses this by speaking about being at the “base of the mountains” and in the “belly of Sheol.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Repentance\n\nScholars are divided over whether Jonah’s repentance was genuine or whether he was trying to save his life. In light of his attitude in chapter 4, it is uncertain whether he was genuinely repentant. If possible, it is best for translators to avoid taking a definitive stance on whether Jonah’s repentance was genuine. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

View File

@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ front:intro axt4 0 # Introduction to Malachi\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
1:4 x6kr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַ⁠אֲנִ֣י אֶהֱר֑וֹס 1 Here **tear down** stands for “destroy.” Alternate translation: “but I will destroy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:4 zv9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns גְּב֣וּל רִשְׁעָ֔ה 1 Here **wickedness** stands either for wicked people or for wicked actions. Alternate translation: “country of wicked people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:5 bq14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche וְ⁠עֵינֵי⁠כֶ֖ם תִּרְאֶ֑ינָה 1 Here **your own eyes** stands for the people themselves. Alternate translation: “You yourselves will see this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1:6 zu71 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh rebukes the priests using an imaginary conversation in which the priests protest that they are doing right and Yahweh tells them what they are doing wrong.
1:6 zu71 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh rebukes the priests using an imaginary conversation in which the priests protest that they are doing right and Yahweh tells them what they are doing wrong.
1:6 u3vj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בּוֹזֵ֣י שְׁמִ֔⁠י 1 Here **my name** stands for Yahweh himself. Alternate translation: “who treat me as though you hate me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:6 awt1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion בַּ⁠מֶּ֥ה בָזִ֖ינוּ אֶת־שְׁמֶֽ⁠ךָ 1 Here the priests are asking a question in order to state that they have not really despised Yahweh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “We have not really despised your name.” or “Tell us how we have despised your name, because we do not think that we have done so.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1:7 dyc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לֶ֣חֶם מְגֹאָ֔ל 1 Here **polluted** describes anything that is not suitable to sacrifice to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ front:intro axt4 0 # Introduction to Malachi\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
2:3 m2bs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠נָשָׂ֥א אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם אֵלָֽי⁠ו 1 This difficult expression can be translated as “God will take you away with it,” that is, with the dung. This expression continues the same metaphor of slaughtering animals for sacrifice, and it can be put in active form. Alternate translation: “they will throw you on the dung pile; God will make sure that they take you away when they remove all the dung” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:3 zti7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠נָשָׂ֥א אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם אֵלָֽי⁠ו 1 This could mean: (1) God will punish the unfaithful priests by killing them and causing their bodies to be carried away on the piles of animal dung, or (2) God will punish the unfaithful priests in such a horrible way that it will be as if their bodies had been carried away with the animal dung. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 cr4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לֵוִ֔י 1 Here **Levi** represents his descendants, the tribe of Levi. Alternate translation: “so that my covenant may be with you, the descendants of Levi” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:5 x7pv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh speaks of the tribe of Levi as though they are Levi. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:5 x7pv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh speaks of the tribe of Levi as though they are Levi. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:5 t8fs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּרִיתִ֣⁠י ׀ הָיְתָ֣ה אִתּ֗⁠וֹ הַֽ⁠חַיִּים֙ וְ⁠הַ֨⁠שָּׁל֔וֹם 1 Here the intended results of the **covenant** are spoken of as if they were the covenant itself. Alternate translation: “The purpose of my covenant with Levi was for the priests to live in prosperity and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:5 f2if rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis מוֹרָ֖א וַ⁠יִּֽירָאֵ֑⁠נִי 1 This expression continues the same metaphor, but leaves out an idea that is implied in the text. This can begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “My covenant with him was also fear, and he feared me” or “In my covenant with him, I required him to fear me, and he did fear me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:5 td35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy שְׁמִ֖⁠י 1 Here **my name** stands for God himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ front:intro axt4 0 # Introduction to Malachi\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
2:9 wq7p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֵֽינְ⁠כֶם֙ שֹׁמְרִ֣ים אֶת־דְּרָכַ֔⁠י 1 Here **ways** stands for “desires” and “behavior.” These ways are spoken of as if they were things that could be kept by people. Alternate translation: “you have not followed my desires in how you should live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:9 z4gm וְ⁠נֹשְׂאִ֥ים פָּנִ֖ים בַּ⁠תּוֹרָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “but have set easy standards of behavior for people you like and difficult standards of behavior for people you do not like”
2:9 z9yt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠נֹשְׂאִ֥ים פָּנִ֖ים 1 Here the habit of favoring some people more than others is spoken of as if it were a thing that could be shown to others. Alternate translation: “but have made people aware that you favor some people more than others (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:10 h2mp General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nHere the prophet Malachi begins to speak to his fellow Israelites.
2:10 h2mp 0 # General Information:\n\nHere the prophet Malachi begins to speak to his fellow Israelites.
2:10 e1l1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הֲ⁠ל֨וֹא אָ֤ב אֶחָד֙ לְ⁠כֻלָּ֔⁠נוּ הֲ⁠ל֛וֹא אֵ֥ל אֶֽחָ֖ד בְּרָאָ֑⁠נוּ 1 Malachi asks these questions in order to remind his fellow Israelites about what they already know. Alternate translation: “You know that we all have one father, that our God has created a nation out of us.” or “You all know that God is the father of all us Israelites, because he is the one who made our nation.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:10 q37t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הֲ⁠ל֛וֹא אֵ֥ל אֶֽחָ֖ד בְּרָאָ֑⁠נוּ 1 This question is meant to express a statement. Alternate translation: “Certainly it is the same God who has created us.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:10 t4al בְּרָאָ֑⁠נוּ 1 This probably refers to God forming the Hebrews into a nation.
@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ front:intro axt4 0 # Introduction to Malachi\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
2:17 ze8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion אַיֵּ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֥י הַ⁠מִּשְׁפָּֽט 1 The priests ask this question in order to claim either that Yahweh does not care whether people do evil or not, or that he never punishes evildoers. Alternate translation: “God certainly does not punish evil people!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:17 kw1t אֱלֹהֵ֥י הַ⁠מִּשְׁפָּֽט 1 the God who punishes evildoers justly
3:intro wb48 0 # Malachi 3 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Messiah\n\nThere are several prophecies in this chapter concerning the Messiah and the one who comes before the Messiah. At times, this chapter switches between prophesying about the first coming of the Messiah and the second coming of the Messiah without formal divisions between them. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nSeveral rhetorical questions are used in this chapter to convince the reader of the truth of what he is saying and of their sin. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
3:1 zeq2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh begins speaking again to the people of Israel in verse 1, but the prophet Malachi begins speaking in verse 2.
3:1 zeq2 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh begins speaking again to the people of Israel in verse 1, but the prophet Malachi begins speaking in verse 2.
3:1 v6se הִנְ⁠נִ֤י 1 Alternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you”
3:1 j5pe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּ⁠פִנָּה־דֶ֖רֶךְ לְ⁠פָנָ֑⁠י 1 Here getting people ready to welcome Yahweh is spoken of as if a road were being cleared for Yahweh to travel on. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:1 d1j7 הָ⁠אָד֣וֹן ׀ אֲשֶׁר־אַתֶּ֣ם מְבַקְשִׁ֗ים וּ⁠מַלְאַ֨ךְ הַ⁠בְּרִ֜ית אֲשֶׁר־אַתֶּ֤ם חֲפֵצִים֙ 1 Some modern versions translate this in a way that implies that these two expressions refer to the same person. Other modern versions leave this matter ambiguous. We recommend that translations leave this matter ambiguous, as the ULT and UST do.
@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ front:intro axt4 0 # Introduction to Malachi\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
3:12 mfq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠אִשְּׁר֥וּ אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם כָּל־הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֑ם 1 Here to be called **blessed** stands for being blessed. Alternate translation: “All the nations will know that you have been blessed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:12 bvs1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כָּל־הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֑ם 1 This expression stands for the people in all **the nations**. Alternate translation: “The people in all the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:12 rm7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns אֶ֣רֶץ חֵ֔פֶץ 1 Here **delight** stands for the condition in which the inhabitants of a land take delight in their land. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:13 l55w General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThese verses begin a new section in the book. Here Yahweh is speaking to the people of Israel.
3:13 l55w 0 # General Information:\n\nThese verses begin a new section in the book. Here Yahweh is speaking to the people of Israel.
3:13 h229 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns חָזְק֥וּ עָלַ֛⁠י דִּבְרֵי⁠כֶ֖ם 1 Here **strong** stands for “harsh” or “terrible.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:13 f9dh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor חָזְק֥וּ עָלַ֛⁠י דִּבְרֵי⁠כֶ֖ם 1 Here **Your words** stands for “What you have said.” Alternate translation: “What you have said about me is terrible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:13 fv74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion מַה־נִּדְבַּ֖רְנוּ עָלֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 The people ask this question in order to claim that they have said nothing against God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “We have not said anything among ourselves against you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ front:intro axt4 0 # Introduction to Malachi\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
3:15 maa8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֲנַ֖חְנוּ מְאַשְּׁרִ֣ים זֵדִ֑ים 1 Here to be called **blessed** stands for being blessed. Alternate translation: “we say that the arrogant are blessed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:15 a55n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive נַ֖חְנוּ מְאַשְּׁרִ֣ים זֵדִ֑ים 1 This may be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “we say that the arrogant are well off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:15 e45r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵֽטוּ 1 That is, “and they escape Gods punishment.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:16 e2b8 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThe event described here may have taken place after the godly people in Israel repented of their sins.
3:16 e2b8 0 # General Information:\n\nThe event described here may have taken place after the godly people in Israel repented of their sins.
3:16 le6y וַ֠⁠יִּכָּתֵב סֵ֣פֶר זִכָּר֤וֹן לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙ לְ⁠יִרְאֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה 1 This could mean: (1) the Israelites wrote a book so they would remember what they had promised and listed the names of people who feared Yahweh or (2) Yahweh caused someone in heaven to write a book with the names of people who feared him.
3:16 tdq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns סֵ֣פֶר זִכָּר֤וֹן 1 This expression refers to any book that helps people remember important things, such as events or people who lived in the past. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:16 b8vc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וּ⁠לְ⁠חֹשְׁבֵ֖י שְׁמֽ⁠וֹ 1 Here **his name** stands for God himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

Can't render this file because it contains an unexpected character in line 38 and column 139.

View File

@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
5:4 nep6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he shattered his shackles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:4 fk7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πέδαις 1 Here, **shackles** are pieces of metal that people wrap around the arms and legs of prisoners. The shackles are then attached with chains to objects that do not move so the prisoners cannot move far. Think of an object in your culture that is used to constrain people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
5:6 y6c2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ ἰδὼν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ μακρόθεν, ἔδραμεν καὶ προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ 1 After **having seen Jesus**, the man then ran to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After the man saw Jesus from a distance, he then ran to him and bowed down before him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
5:7 ux6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIf it would be helpful in your language, the information in this verse and 5:8 may be reordered to present the events in the order that they happened, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
5:7 ux6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events 0 # General Information:\n\nIf it would be helpful in your language, the information in this verse and 5:8 may be reordered to present the events in the order that they happened, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
5:7 ppu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου? 1 The unclean spirit asks this question out of fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Leave me alone, Jesus, Son of the Most High God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5:7 kd19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου 1 **Son of the Most High God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
5:9 h6ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive λέγει αὐτῷ, Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν. 1 The spirit who is speaking speaks on behalf of all of the spirits who are possessing the man. Here, **we** includes him and all of the other spirits. Make sure that this is understood in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
6:56 bqzf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism εἰς κώμας, ἢ εἰς πόλεις, ἢ εἰς ἀγροὺς 1 These three phrases mean basically the same thing. The second and third emphasize the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “any village and city, or even in the rural area” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
7:intro vq1j 0 # Mark 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:67, which are words quoted from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Hand washing\n\nThe Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty, because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people please God by trusting and obeying him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “Ephphatha”\n\nThis is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 18, 32, 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
7:1 b9ul rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων 1 This verse introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
7:2 wd6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThe following verses explain the significance of this verse. Since it is explained in the following verses, you do not need to explain its meaning here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
7:2 wd6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo 0 # General Information:\n\nThe following verses explain the significance of this verse. Since it is explained in the following verses, you do not need to explain its meaning here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
7:3 mj6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background γὰρ 1 This verse and the next verse are added to explain why the Jewish leaders did not approve of what Jesus disciples were doing. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “They were appalled because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
7:3 x0b6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κρατοῦντες τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 The **tradition of the elders** consisted of teachings that were handed down from generation to generation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “observing strictly the teachings which past generations had taught them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:4 d3qc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ποτηρίων καὶ ξεστῶν καὶ χαλκίων 1 The **cups, and pots, and copper vessels** would have been used for consuming food and drinks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “cups, pots, and copper vessels for eating and drinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1046,7 +1046,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
12:41 rl1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πολλά 1 Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “much money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
12:42 g6ry rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney λεπτὰ δύο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 1 The word **lepta** is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin used by the Jews. It was equivalent to a few minutes wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or use a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
12:42 n29e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 1 A **quadrans** was the smallest Roman coin. Mark is seeking to help his readers, who are Roman, understand the value of **two leptas** in their own currency. You could clarify in your translation that a **quadrans** is a Roman coin, as the UST does, or you can leave this information untranslated. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
12:43 ipl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he gives his reason for saying that. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 4344, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
12:43 ipl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he gives his reason for saying that. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 4344, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
12:43 q124 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 See how you translated the statement **Truly I say to you** in [3:28](../03/28.md).
12:43 ih0m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ χήρα αὕτη ἡ πτωχὴ 1 Even though it is not literally true that the widow has put more money into the offering box than all the rich people, this is still not figurative language. As Jesus explains in the next verse, he means that she has put in proportionately more than all the others, relative to her means, and that is literally true. But Jesus makes the seemingly untrue statement first, using it to get his disciples to reflect on how it can be true. So it would be appropriate to translate Jesus words directly and not interpret them as if they were figurative. For example, it would be a figurative interpretation to say, “God considers what this poor widow has given to be more valuable than the gifts of all the others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:43 n8z5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντων & τῶν βαλλόντων 1 In context, **all** means specifically all of the rich people who were putting large monetary gifts in the collection boxes. Alternate translation: “all of those rich people putting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1137,7 +1137,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
13:20 q8hm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the phrase **be saved** refers to being saved from physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone would die” or “no one would survive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:20 fz5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς, οὓς ἐξελέξατο 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase to express the idea and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the people whom he chose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
13:20 af7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς 1 Jesus is using the adjective **elect** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase as modeled by the UST.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
13:21 d9gr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verse 21 Jesus gives a command, and in verse 22 he gives the reason for the command. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 2122 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
13:21 d9gr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verse 21 Jesus gives a command, and in verse 22 he gives the reason for the command. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 2122 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
13:21 qsfu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, ἴδε, ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε, ἐκεῖ, μὴ πιστεύετε 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And do not believe anyone who says to you that the Christ is either here or there” or “And do not believe anyone who says to you that the Christ is in this location or that location” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
13:21 yfd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἴδε, ἐκεῖ 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Look, there is the Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
13:22 yw81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγερθήσονται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “will arise” or “will come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

Can't render this file because it is too large.

View File

@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
3:14 tn24 εἰς τὰς ἀναγκαίας χρείας 1 Alternate translation: “that enable them to help people who lack necessary things”
3:14 mji4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι 1 Paul speaks of people doing good work as if they were trees bearing good fruit. Alternate translation: “so that they will not lead useless lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:14 xy32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι 1 You can state this positively: “in this way they will be fruitful” or “in this way they will be productive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3:15 j3y2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul ends his letter to Titus.
3:15 j3y2 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul ends his letter to Titus.
3:15 abci ἀσπάζονταί σε 1 Here, **you** is singular. This is a personal greeting to Titus.
3:15 k1sa οἱ μετ’ ἐμοῦ πάντες 1 Alternate translation: “All the people who are with me” or “All of the believers who are here with me”
3:15 f4vc τοὺς φιλοῦντας ἡμᾶς ἐν πίστει 1 This could refer to: (1) the believers who love us. (2) the believers who love us because we share the same belief.

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
190 3:14 tn24 εἰς τὰς ἀναγκαίας χρείας 1 Alternate translation: “that enable them to help people who lack necessary things”
191 3:14 mji4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι 1 Paul speaks of people doing good work as if they were trees bearing good fruit. Alternate translation: “so that they will not lead useless lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
192 3:14 xy32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι 1 You can state this positively: “in this way they will be fruitful” or “in this way they will be productive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
193 3:15 j3y2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul ends his letter to Titus.
194 3:15 abci ἀσπάζονταί σε 1 Here, **you** is singular. This is a personal greeting to Titus.
195 3:15 k1sa οἱ μετ’ ἐμοῦ πάντες 1 Alternate translation: “All the people who are with me” or “All of the believers who are here with me”
196 3:15 f4vc τοὺς φιλοῦντας ἡμᾶς ἐν πίστει 1 This could refer to: (1) the believers who love us. (2) the believers who love us because we share the same belief.